mp-0556-r i240 sports complex oklahoma city, oklahoma

MP-0556-R I240 Sports Complex Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

SEALS PAGE 1

CIVIL ENGINEER HALFF ASSOCIATES, INC. 2000 N CLASSEN BLVD. SUITE S120 OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 73106 TEL: (405) 493-0318 JONATHAN HEUSEL, PE

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE HALFF ASSOCIATES, INC. 2000 N CLASSEN BLVD. SUITE S120 OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 73106 TEL: (405) 493-0318 NATE L. CLAIR, PLA

ARCHITECTURE MILES ASSOCIATES 865 RESEARCH PARKWAY, STE. 100 OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 73104 TEL: (405) 235-3915 GARRETT F. MILES, AIA

6/10/2021

MP-0556-R I240 Sports Complex Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

SEALS PAGE 2

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER HALFF ASSOCIATES, INC. 1201 NORTH BOWSER ROAD RICHARDSON, TEXAS 75081-2275 TEL: (214) 346-6212 Nathan Hearn, P.E.

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER KFC ENGINEERING (KIRKPATRICK FOREST CURTIS PC) 525 CENTRAL PARK DR, SUITE 202 OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 73105 TEL: (405) 528-4596 Curtis Greenwood, PE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DOCUMENT PAGE

Cover Page:

APPROVAL SHEET ...................................................................................................................... 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................ 4 NOTICE TO BIDDERS ................................................................................................................. 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ................................................................................................... 6

SPECIAL PROVISIONS .............................................................................................................. 16

SPECIAL PROVISIONS – TECHNICAL ................................................................................... 30 SPECIAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS – PAVING ................................................................. 321

LIST OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS...................................................................................... 337

CONTRACT ............................................................................................................................... 338 PERFORMANCE BOND ................................................................................................... 341 STATUTORY BOND ........................................................................................................ 344

MAINTENANCE BOND ................................................................................................... 346 DEFECT BOND ................................................................................................................. 349

CERTIFICATE OF NONDISCRIMINATION .......................................................................... 351 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SUBCONTRACTING PLAN & AFFIDAVIT ......... 352 CLOSE OUT REPORT .............................................................................................................. 353

CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ............................................................................................. 355

LIST OF DOCUMENTS REQUIRED FOR THIS BID ............................................................ 357 SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDING DOCUMENTS ......................................... 358

Attachments:

Consulting (insert either “Architect’s” or “Engineer's”) Plans and Drawings

Bid “Item Response Form”

City Standard 4/5/2021

THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY

NOTICE TO BIDDERS

Notice is hereby given that The City of Oklahoma City (“City”) will electronically receive and open sealed Bids for the construction of:

MP-0556 RI-240 Sports Complex Renovation

in the Office of the City Clerk, 2nd Floor, Municipal Building, 200 N. Walker Avenue, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73102, until 10:00:00 a.m., on the 3rd day of November 2021. Bids shall be opened electronically at the above stated time for receipt of Bids or as soon thereafter as practicable.

Bids must be made in accordance with this Notice to Bidders and the Bidding Documents, which are on file and available for examination at www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g.

Prequalification Waived in Favor of Required Special Questionnaire and Other Additional Submissions. The requirements of the Ordinance No. 26,614 approved by City Council on December 8, 2020, are waived (for the purpose of bidding only) for this project. All other requirements of the prequalification ordinance (working in a public right-of-way) are not waived. In lieu of prequalification, Bidder is required to submit other evidence of knowledge and experience relating to Bidder's ability to perform or manage the work required for this project. The special questionnaire form is included in the Bidding Documents and must be properly completed and submitted with the Bid on the Bid Date and Bid Time. Failure to properly complete the form may be cause for the Bid to be recommended for rejection. Bidders must also preregister for Electronic Bidding at https://www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g (formerly www.bidsync).

Pre-Bid Conference: Non-mandatory Virtual Pre-Bid Conference will be held Friday October 22, 2021 at 11:00 am. For call in audio only, please dial +1 405-534-4946,,379105359# Please RSVP through the electronic bidding system to receive link for audio/video meeting. All potential bidders are responsible to read all bidding documents and submit questions in writing through the electronic bidding system by October 28, 2021 at 12:00 pm. All additional questions in the virtual meeting will be recorded in an addendum.

Site visit: Non-mandatory, will be held October 21, 2021 at 3:00 pm to 4:00 pm at project location. 3960 E. I-240 SERVICE ROAD, Oklahoma City, OK 73135

Additional information is contained in the Bidding Documents. Prior to bidding this project, Bidders must carefully examine the Bidding Documents, Addenda (if any) and the City of Oklahoma City Standard Specifications for Public Impr ovements.

https://www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g



INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

ARTICLE 1 - IN GENERAL

1.0 ACCESS

1.0.1 It is the policy of the City to ensure that communications with participants and members of the public with disabilities are as effective as communications with others. Anyone with a disability who requires an accommodation, a modification of policies or procedures, or an auxiliary aid or service in order to participate in a meeting should contact City Staff or TDD 297-2020 as soon as possible but not later than 48 hours (not including weekends or holidays) before the scheduled meeting. The department will give primary consideration to the choice of auxiliary aid or service requested by the individual with disability.

1.0.2 The City does not provide access to a computer for electronic bidding or electronic bid submission.

1.1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS; DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 The “Bidding Documents” consist of: the “Bid Package”, Project Plans, Standard Specifications, Special Provisions and the documents referenced or incorporated, Bid Security or Bid Bond, Addenda and Contract and Bond Forms. Electronic copies of the Bidding Documents are available through the Electronic Bidding Program.

The “Bid Package” consists of: Bid Package Cover Sheet; Notice to Bidders; Instructions to Bidders; List of Documents Required for this Bid; Signature Requirements for Bidding Documents; Item Response Form; Anti/Non-Collusion Affidavit; Business Relationship Affidavit; Small and Disadvantaged Local Business Subcontracting Affidavit/Plan; any other documents listed in the List of Documents Required for this Bid; and any Addenda issued prior to the Bid Date.

Each Bidder shall be responsible for submitting their Bid in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all Addenda. Additionally, each Bidder shall be responsible for acquiring and distributing the necessary documents required to develop the Bid and construct the project.

The “Contract Documents” consist of: Bidding Documents; Contract; Performance Bond; Statutory Bond; Maintenance Bond; Defect Bond, if required; Certificate of Insurance; Certificate of Nondiscrimination; Special Provisions; Project Plans, Standard Specifications; other documents provided in the Contract Documents or required to be submitted with the Bidding Documents; and all Addenda issued prior to the Bid Date. Any Amendments and/or Change Orders issued after the award of Contract shall be a part of the Contract Documents upon their approval by the City.

1.1.2 The Definitions set forth in Part 1 of the City's "Standard Specifications for Construction


of Public Improvements", and in the Bid Documents, are applicable to the Bidding Documents.

1.1.3 The "Bid Date" and "Bid Time" are the date and time for the receipt of Bids as provided in the Notice to Bidders.

1.1.4 The "Architect/Engineer" is that person or firm under contract with the City, Trust, or other contracting entity to prepare the plans and specifications for and supervise the construction of the Work.

1.1.5 The "Bid Security" is that security submitted with the Bid which shall be in the form of a certified check, cashier's check or Bid Bond equal to five percent (5%) of the Bid or of an irrevocable letter of credit in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bid and issued in accordance with the provisions of the Public Competitive Bidding Act of 1974, as amended. (61 Okla. Stat. 2011, §107) The calculation of the amount of the Bid Security shall be as provided in Section 4.2.1 of these Instructions to Bidders. Provide the Bid Bond through the Electronic Bidding Process. Irrevocable Letters of Credit, certified check and/or cashier's check must be hand delivered to the Office of the City Clerk, 2nd Floor, Municipal Building, 200 N. Walker Avenue, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73102 prior to Bid Time.

1.1.6 "Prequalification" or "Pre-qualified" shall mean that prior to the Bid Date the Bidder is listed by the Prequalification Review Board as “Pre-qualified” for the type or types of Work required for the project.

1.1.7 "Completed" shall mean that the Work shall have been constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications and other Bidding Documents and is fully completed, the final inspection(s) have been made, and any corrections made to the satisfaction of the City Engineer.

1.1.8 "Acceptance" shall mean the formal recorded acceptance of the project by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City or Awarding Public Entity.

1.1.9 “Small and Disadvantaged Local Business Subcontracting Program” shall mean that program which implements the policy adopted by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City resolution of June 3, 2008, to promote and encourage the use of small and disadvantaged local businesses as subcontractors on public construction contracts and to require contractors performing public construction contracts to submit a Small and Disadvantaged Local Business Subcontracting Plan.

1.1.10 The “Electronic Bidding Process” shall mean a bid process through electronic means only. All signatures will be applied through electronic methods. Electronic Bidding Process is available at www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g. For any assistance in completing the Electronic Bidding Process, please contact Periscope by email at [email protected] or telephone at 800-990-9339.

1.1.11. The “Bidder Acknowledgment” shall mean that the Bidder prepared this Bid and, before preparing the Bid, carefully read and examined the Bidding Documents and any other documentation or information. Bidder is familiar with and able to comply with all the provisions

http://www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g

mailto:[email protected]


of the Bidding Documents. Bidder agrees that if this Bid is accepted, Bidder will enter into the Contract with the City of Oklahoma City and properly submit the required Bonds, documents, and insurance within seven (7) calendar days following the City’s notification of its intent to award Contract, unless such time is extended by the City Engineer. Bidder hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) calendar days after the Work Order is issued by the City Engineer and to complete the work within the number of working days or by the calendar date specified in the Special Provisions of the Bidding Documents. Bidder encloses the Bid Security as required in Bidding Documents. The Anti/Non-Collusion Affidavit, in its entirety, is incorporated herein by reference.

1.1.12 “City Engineer” as defined in the Standard Specifications. When the project includes a participating public trust any notifications and approvals will also include the General Manager of any additional Awarding Public Entity.

1.1.13 “Awarding Public Entity” defined as the public entity, City and/or any participating public trust, awarding a Contract to a Bidder and entering a Contract for Public Improvement Work.

1.2 CONFIDENTIALITY

1.2.1 No Bidder shall divulge the sealed contents of a Bid to any person whomsoever, except those having a partnership or other financial interest with the Bidder in said Bid, until after the sealed Bids have been opened. A violation on the part of the Bidder shall make void any Contract made by the City with the Bidder based upon such Bid.

1.3 PREQUALIFICATION AND LICENSES

1.3.1 Specific procedures for prequalification are established in the "Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements." Application for prequalification must be made to the Contractor's Prequalification Board and the required information provided to the Board. Unless prequalification is specifically waived in the Bidding Documents for the project or by formal City action, all Bidders must be listed by the Prequalification Review Board as "Pre-qualified" for the type or types of work before the Bid Date. In the event prequalification is waived, or in addition to prequalification, the Bidder may be required to present other evidence of qualification as required in the Bidding Documents.

1.3.2 Bidder’s shall be Pre-qualified for the specific type or types of construction, as provided in the Bidding Documents and the City of Oklahoma City’s “Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements.” Unless prequalification is specifically waived in the Special Provisions for the project, the City Clerk will not tabulate submission of any proposed Contractor or Bidder who is not listed, at the time for receipt of Bids, as Pre-qualified for the type or types of work required for the project and such submission will not be considered by the City.

1.3.3 The prequalification requirements for the project are set forth in the Special Provisions of the Bidding Documents.


1.3.4 Regardless of whether or not prequalification is required, any proposed Contractor or Bidder must have obtained any license or licenses required by the City which is/are necessary to the accomplishment of the work. Such license(s) must have been obtained prior to the submission of a Bid on the project. Failure to possess the necessary license(s) is reason for a recommendation to the City that a Contract not be awarded.

1.4 SALES TAX

1.4.1 Oklahoma sales and use tax exemptions may be available to Contractors on City Projects. Contractor may pursue any available tax exemption at its own risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for interpreting and determining the applicability and availability of these exemptions. The Contractor should consult private legal counsel to determine whether purchases are exempt from applicable taxes. The Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining all documents and for complying with all regulations and procedures applicable to its use of these exemptions. The City’s tax exemption information is available through the City website and at: http://okcweb/documents/files/W9-2008.PDF; however, by providing such information the City neither warrants the applicability or availability of any tax exemption nor does it waive or modify the provisions in Section 1.4.3 below.

1.4.2 Oklahoma sales and use tax exemptions are not available to Contractors on Trust Projects. However, Oklahoma sales and use tax exemptions may be available to the Trust for direct purchases made by the Trust. The Trust will only make direct purchases related to a Project as specifically and expressly stated in a Special Provision.

1.4.3 The Contractor will be responsible for and bear the cost of all applicable sales and use taxes and all other applicable local, state, or federal taxes pertaining to this Project. Applicable taxes will be deemed a cost the Contractor has included in its Bid and Contract Price (Lump Sum Price and Unit Prices) and by extension of such Unit Prices in any subsequently issued Amendment. Similarly the Contractor must include any applicable taxes in any Change Order. Neither the City nor any participating Trust will be liable for any change in taxes or any new or additional taxes; such taxes will be and are a risk and liability of the Bidder or Contractor included in the its Bid and Contract Price and any such change in or new or additional tax will not be paid or reimbursed by the City or Trust.

1.5 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

1.5.1 The City of Oklahoma City's "Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements," as amended, shall govern all aspects of bidding for and construction of the project. Exceptions to the "Standard Specifications" will be set forth in the Special Provisions. The Special Provisions shall prevail over any conflicting statement in the Standard Specifications. The Standard Specifications are available for review at www.okc.gov or purchase in the Development Center, 8th Floor, 420 W. Main Street, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73102.

1.6 ELECTRONIC BIDDING

http://okcweb/documents/files/W9-2008.PDF


1.6.1 The Electronic Bidding Process is available at www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g. For any assistance in completing the electronic process, please contact Periscope by email at [email protected] or telephone at 800-990-9339.

1.6.2 Bidders must preregister for Electronic Bidding at www.periscopeholdings.com/s2g prior to completing, signing and submitting a bid on this project.

ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that:

2.1.1 The Bidder has read carefully and understands the Bidding Documents and has inspected the Project Site and become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has informed himself by independent research of the difficulties to be encountered and personally judged the accessibility of the Work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the Work and of the time required for its completion and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance therewith.

2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the Bid is submitted and for other portions of the work, if any, being Bid concurrently or presently under construction.

2.1.3 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, systems or services required by the Bidding Documents without exception.

2.1.4 The Bidder has read and acknowledges that by confirming the Bid electronically, the Bidder is accepting the Bidder Acknowledgment as defined in section 1.1.11.

ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.1 COPIES

3.1.1 The Bidding Documents are available through the Electronic Bidding Process.

3.1.2 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the City nor the consulting Architect or consulting Engineer assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.2.1 The Bidder shall at once report to the City Engineer or the consulting Architect/Engineer any errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. All requests for interpretation of the Bidding Documents must be made to the City Engineer and to any consulting architect or consulting engineer.






3.2.2 Addendum Required. The Bidding Documents represent all the information the City will provide. Interpretations and corrections of and/or changes to the Bidding Documents will be made only by addendum. Such addenda shall be issued by the City Engineer and approved or ratified by the City. Interpretations and/or changes made in any other manner will not be binding upon the City and Bidders shall not rely upon them. All Addenda will be issued through the Electronic Bidding Process.

3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. The Notes to Buyer box in the Electronic Bidding Process cannot be used for substitutions. Using the Notes to Buyer box may result in the Bid being rejected.

Pre-Bid Consideration; Addendum required. No substitution will be considered prior to the receipt of Bids unless a written request for approval has been received by the City Engineer or consulting Architect/Engineer within seven (7) days prior to the Bid Date. Such requests shall include the name of the material, product, or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, products, equipment or other portions of the work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included in the request. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the Bidder.

3.3.3 If a proposed substitution is approved prior to Bid Date, such approval will be set forth in an addendum issued by the City Engineer and approved or ratified by the City. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

3.3.4 Post-Contract Consideration. Substitutions may be considered after the award of Contract unless specifically prohibited in the Bidding Documents. However, any Bidder basing a Bid on a substitution not approved by pre-Bid addendum does so at the risk of being required to provide the materials designated in the Bidding Documents.

3.4 ADDENDA DELIVERY AND RECEIPT

3.4.1 The City Engineer may issue addenda as may be necessary in the best interest of the City. Addenda may amend the date and/or time for receipt of Bids or any specification, item, document or requirement in the Bidding Documents. Addenda will be delivered through the Electronic Bidding Process. It shall be the obligation of the Bidder to ascertain through the Electronic Bidding Process prior to the Bid Date, whether Bidder has received all addenda. Bidder has the obligation to read and comply with the terms of the Bidding Documents as amended by addenda, if any.

3.4.2 Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection through the Electronic Bidding Process.

3.4.3 The Electronic Bidding Process shall be considered proof that the City delivered notification of an addendum to a Bidder.

3.5 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

The Pre-Bid Conference will begin at the designated time; attendance will be recorded by roll call; only full-time employees of the prospective Bidder’s company will be considered as eligible representatives for attendance; and five minutes after the meeting is called to order, the virtual meeting will be closed for entry. The official timekeeper for closing the entry shall be the Awarding Public Agency staff member chairing the Pre-Bid Conference

ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS

4.1.1 The Bid must be submitted through the Electronic Bidding Process.

4.1.2 All forms, all blanks and all affidavits must be completed, signed and submitted through the Electronic Bidding Process.

4.1.3 All prices must be completed and submitted electronically. Where so indicated by the makeup of the Item Response Form, sums shall be expressed in numerals. All base bid items must have a price indicated. All alternate bids, whether add alternates or deduct alternates, must have a price indicated, unless expressly stated otherwise in the Special Provisions. Should the Special Provisions expressly state that Bidders need not bid on all alternates, a Bidder that does not wish to bid on that add/deduct alternate bid must enter “No Bid” into the Notes to Buyer box and a bid of “zero dollars” must be entered for that line item.



4.1.4 Where detailed or unit prices are requested or required in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder must complete and submit detailed or unit prices on the Item Response Form and the total bid amount shall be the cumulative total of the detailed or unit prices.

Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, where unit prices are bid, payments and claims will be based on actual quantities used. Any substantial change(s) in quantities required to complete the work will require a Contract amendment and any deduction or increase in payment will be based on unit prices and actual verified and authorized quantities.

4.2 BID SECURITY

4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Security in the form of a Bid Bond and/or irrevocable letter of credit or a certified check and/or cashier's check delivered by bid receipt time, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the amount of the Bid. Bid Bonds must be uploaded in the Electronic Bidding Process and must be submitted electronically with the Bid. Irrevocable Letters of Credit, certified check and/or cashier’s check must be hand-delivered to the Office of the City Clerk, 2nd Floor, Municipal Building, 200 N. Walker Avenue, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73102, in a sealed envelope with notations including the Bidder’s name, the project number and “Bid Security,” prior to Bid Time. For the purposes of this section, Bid shall mean the highest combination of the base bid plus all add/deduct alternate bids. The Bid Security is a guaranty that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the City on the terms stated in the Bid and will furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds as required and/or the required certificates of insurance and other required documents, the amount of the Bid Security shall be forfeited to the City as liquidated damages, not as a penalty.

4.2.2 The City has the right to retain the Bid Security of Bidders until either (a) the Contract and bonds and other required documents have been executed or submitted by the successful Bidder, or (b) the specified time to award Bids has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn in accordance with State law, or (c) all Bids have been rejected, or (d) another Bidder has been determined to be the successful Bidder.

4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

4.3.1 The Item Response Form and affidavits, the Bid Security and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be submitted through the Electronic Bidding Process. Bids will only be accepted electronically per Oklahoma City Municipal Code 2-871 . 4.3.2 All Bids from prequalified Bidders timely received may be considered by the City prior to a Contract being awarded. Bids shall be electronically delivered through the Electronic Bidding Process, not more than 96 hours, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, prior to the Bid Date and Bid Time. All Bids received before more than 96 hours before the Bid Date and Bid Time, will not be considered. Submissions will not be received after the time and date for receipt. through the Electronic Bidding Process.


4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely completion and submission of the Bid through the Electronic Bidding Process.

4.3.4 Any bid not submitted through the Electronic Bidding Process is invalid and will not receive consideration.

4.3.5 The Bid affidavits must be properly completed, signed, sworn to, notarized and submitted with the Bid electronically.

The required affidavits are:

(1) Anti/Non-Collusion Affidavit(2) Business Relationship Affidavit(3) Such other Affidavits as may be required by law

4.4 BIDS NOT TO BE MODIFIED OR WITHDRAWN

4.4.1 No Bid shall be withdrawn, altered, changed, executed or otherwise revised in any manner by any Bidder once delivered to the City Clerk through the Electronic Bidding Process.

ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

5.1 OPENING OF BIDS; TIME FOR CONSIDERATION

5.1.1 Pursuant to City Ordinance, Bids submitted and timely received will be opened publicly and will be read aloud in the presence of the City Clerk, the City Auditor and the Purchasing Agent or their designees at the time stated in the Notice to Bidders. Opened Bids will remain on file in the Office of the City Clerk for at least forty-eight (48) hours before a Contract is entered into. A tabulation of Bid information may be made available to the Bidders within a reasonable time.

5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS

5.2.1 The Bids will be considered by the City. The City shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. By Resolution No. 93-01, adopted June 22, 1993, the City Council declared its intent to reject a Bid not accompanied by the required Bid Security, and/or a properly signed Item Response Form, and/or properly completed, signed and notarized Bid affidavits and/or by other item(s) required by the Bidding Documents, and may reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. The City shall have the right to waive immaterial defects or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid, which, in the City's judgment, is in its own best interest.

5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

5.3.1 It is the intent of the City to award a Contract to the lowest and best responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding


Documents.

5.3.2 The City shall have the right to accept add/deduct alternate bids in any order or combination and to determine the lowest and best Bidder on the basis of the sum of the base Bid and such alternates accepted by the City at its discretion, unless otherwise stated in the Special Provisions.

5.3.3 Should a Bidder who is awarded a Contract upon a Bid fail to execute and provide the Contract and bonds or to provide the required certificates of insurance and/or any other required documents, the City Council reserves the right to offer the Contract to the Bidder deemed to be the next lowest and best responsible Bidder.

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT AND BONDS

6.1 BOND AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

6.1.1 See the Special Provision for Bond requirements.

6.1.2 The cost of such bonds shall be included in the amount of the Bid.

6.1.3 The City may, by formal action, reject/not accept any bond if the surety issuing the bond is: (1) now in default or delinquent on any demand on any bond; (2) is an adverse party to the City of Oklahoma City or any of its participating public trusts in any litigation involving bonds issued in favor of the City of Oklahoma City or any of its participating public trusts; or, (3) is not licensed or otherwise permitted to do business in the State of Oklahoma.

6.2 TIME OF DELIVERY CONTRACTS, BONDS AND INSURANCE

6.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required Contract and bonds, together with the certificates of insurance as required in the Special Provisions, to the City’s project manager no later than seven (7) calendar days following the City’s notification of its intent to award Contract, unless thattime is extended by the City Engineer.

6.2.2 The date blanks on the Bonds shall be left blank. The dates will be inserted by the City upon approval of the Contract and Bonds by the Awarding Public Entity.

6.2.3 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. The provisions for the competitive bidding of City projects and the form of and requirements for the Bidding Documents are governed by the Charter and Ordinances of the City of Oklahoma City, the Oklahoma Competitive Bidding Act, the City of Oklahoma City's "Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements," Resolution #93-01 of June 22, 1993, and other adopted policies of the City Council.


SPECIAL PROVISIONS

MP-0556 I-240 Sports Complex Renovations

These Special Provisions are included in and are a part of the Bidding Documents for this project.

1. Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements. The City ofOklahoma City's "Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements" as mostrecently amended, is included by reference in these Bidding Documents in its entirety as thoughfully set forth herein. The provisions of the "Standard Specifications of the Construction ofPublic Improvements" are applicable to and binding upon this project unless and except wherespecifically superseded by a provision(s) of the Special Provisions and/or the Special Provisions-Technical for this project. The Special Provisions-Technical shall prevail over any conflictingstatement in or requirement of the Special Provisions. Copies of the "Standard Specifications forthe Construction of Public Improvements" may purchased in the Development Center, 8th Floor,420 W. Main Street, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73102.

2. Nondiscrimination. Neither the Contractor nor any subcontractors employed on thisproject may discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race,religion, creed, sex, color, national origin, ancestry, age or disability as defined by the Americanswith Disabilities Act. A Certification of Nondiscrimination must be properly signed andsubmitted with the Contract. The requirements of the Certificate must be included in anysubcontracts connected with the performance of the Contract. The Contract may be canceled bythe City for noncompliance with the provisions of the Certificate and the Contractor may bedeclared to be ineligible for further contracts until satisfactory proof of intent to comply shall bemade by the Contractor and/or any subcontractors.

The "Notice of Equal Employment Opportunity" poster must be exhibited in a central and public location at the place of business by the Contractor and each subcontractor while the Contractor and any subcontractors are performing work on the project.

3. Permits or Licenses. The Contractor must, at his own cost, secure all permits and licensesand pay all fees required by City of Oklahoma City Ordinance or State Statute and give allnotices necessary and incidental to the lawful prosecution of the Work.

4. Laws to be Observed. The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with allFederal and State laws and regulations and all City of Oklahoma City Ordinances, Codes andregulations which in any manner affect the conduct of the work and shall observe and shallcomply with all orders and decrees which exist at the present or which may be enacted later, ofbodies or tribunals having jurisdiction or authority over the work and no plea ofmisunderstanding or ignorance thereof will be considered.

5. Safety. Contractor shall establish and implement safety measures, policies and standardsconforming to those required or recommended by governmental and quasi-governmental


authorities including, but not limited to, the requirements of the United States Occupational Safety and Health Act.

6. Contract. Contractor will enter into the Contract with the City of Oklahoma City andproperly submit the executed Contract and the required bonds, documents, and certificates ofinsurance within seven (7) calendar days following the City’s notification of its intent to awardContract, unless said time is extended by the City Engineer. With the Contract, the Contractorwill submit a properly signed Certificate of Nondiscrimination. No work shall be commenceduntil the written Contract has been executed and the required bonds and insurance have beenprovided and a work order has been issued by the City Engineer.

7. Amendments and Change Orders. The provisions of the Contract may be amended orchanged only by an amendment or a change order approved by the City. As used herein, theterms "amendment" and "change order" shall have the following meanings.

“Amendment” shall mean a modification to a construction contract which was Bid on a unit price basis and which modifies the quantity of an item or items based on the unit price stated in the Bid. No amendment shall be effective until it has been approved by the City. (Amendments are not subject to the percent of contract cost limits set in the Oklahoma Competitive Bidding Act, 61 O.S. (2011) Section 121.)

“Change Order” shall mean a modification of a lump sum contract or a contract bid on a unit price basis where a unit price has not been established for a particular item or items of work. The change order may authorize an addition, deletion or revision in the work or an adjustment of the contract price or the contract time. However, the cumulative amount of change orders shall not exceed the limit established by State law. No change order shall become effective until it has first been approved by the City.

8. Pre-Work Conference. The City shall hold a pre-work conference. The Contractor or hisdesignee must attend the conference. The Contractor's superintendent and subcontractor(s) mayattend. The City Engineer or his designee and any consultant for the project and a representativeof the Field Services Division will attend for the City. The conference will be conducted at atime and place established by the City Engineer.

9. Contractor's Responsibility for the Work. Until formal written acceptance by the City, thework shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor. The Contractor shall take everynecessary precaution to prevent injury or damage to the work or any part thereof by the action ofthe elements or any other cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or non-executionof the work. The Contractor shall at his own expense rebuild, repair, restore, and make good allinjuries or damage to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the forgoing causes beforeformal acceptance of the work by the City.

10. Inspection. The City Engineer and his representatives and the consulting architect and hisrepresentatives or consulting engineer and his representatives shall at all times have access to thework. Contractor will provide proper and safe access for inspection. The City may maintaininspectors on the job site for the purpose of inspecting materials, workmanship and conditions of


work and equipment. Contractor shall notify the City Inspector twenty-four (24) hours prior to pouring concrete and at any other times required in the Special Provisions. Contractor shall notify the City Inspector twenty-four (24) hours prior to performing work relating to exposing, supporting, adjusting, connecting or relocating waterlines. The phone number for Field Services is 297-3571. The Field Services office is open between 7:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday.

In addition to the above inspections, the Contractor shall provide proper and safe access for all inspections required by City of Oklahoma City Ordinances and Technical Codes and any other inspections required by Federal or State laws or regulations.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to arrange for and have conducted any and all inspections required by the City of Oklahoma City's Building, Plumbing, Electrical, Mechanical, Fire, and Zoning Codes and to comply with all the provisions of said Codes.

11. Testing. The City Engineer will provide a test schedule for the work and shall designatewhich samples must be taken or tests be conducted and which must be taken or conducted in thepresence of an inspector. The City Engineer may require such additional tests as he deemsnecessary to the proper construction of the project. All tests will be made in accordance with theappropriate specifications. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as the City Engineer or hisrepresentatives may require for collecting and forwarding samples. All tests shall be made at alaboratory designated by the City and at the expense of the City.

12. Payment and Retainage. Partial payments shall be made based on the Work timelycompleted and in accordance with the Contract and the submission of the required documents.Five percent (5%) of all partial payments due shall be withheld as retainage.

Applications for payment shall be made upon the forms provided by the City or photocopies thereof and such forms must be properly completed, signed and notarized. Applications for payments shall have attached thereto the Contractor's invoice and other supporting detail. Contractor must supply invoices for any stored materials for which payment is claimed.

13. Closing a Street. Streets or lanes of streets in the construction zone may be closed onlyupon the prior approval of the City Engineer or his designee. Should a street closing beapproved, the Contractor is responsible for notifying the following at least twenty four (24) hoursin advance of the closing. Notification by email at [email protected] is preferred.

14. Detours. The City Engineer or his designee shall first approve all detour routes whilestreets are closed during construction. The Contractor must sign and maintain all detour routesand the signs and devices must be in conformance with the requirements of the "Manual onUniform Traffic Devices."

15. Barricades and Warning Signs. Where work is carried on in, or adjacent to, any street,alley or public place, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish, erect and maintain suchbarricades, fences, lights, warning signs and danger signals and shall provide such watchmen and



take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the work as may be necessary. In addition, a sufficient number of barricades shall be erected to keep pedestrians and vehicles from entering on or into any work zone(s). From sunset to sunrise, the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one light on each barricade. All devices shall be in conformance with the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." The Contractor shall provide an "after hours" phone number to the City of Oklahoma City's Emergency Operations Center and to the Field Services Division to be used for notification to the Contractor of the need to repair signs, barricades or other warning or control devices. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in the issuance of a Stop Work Order to remain in effect until the deficiencies are corrected. The issuance of a Stop Work Order shall not act to defer or suspend the counting of the working days for the project.

16. Final Cleaning Up. Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and finalpayment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the work surplusand discarded materials, temporary structures, barricades and other warning devices, stumps andportions of trees and debris of any kind. The Contractor shall leave the site or the work in a neatand orderly condition. Waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of atlocations satisfactory to the City Engineer and which are in compliance with Federal, State andCity of Oklahoma City requirements.

17. Insurance and Indemnity. The Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance coverageas provided below. The required insurance shall be maintained in full force and effect untilcompletion and formal acceptance by the City of the Project. The Contractor must provide, payfor, and maintain insurance, written with an insurance company acceptable to the City, for thecoverage and amounts of coverage not less than those set forth below. All insurance must befrom responsible insurance companies eligible to do business in the state of Oklahoma. Therequirements provided below are designed to meet the minimum insurance coverage of the City.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sufficiency of its own insurance program.

All liability policies (except worker’s compensation insurance) must name the City of Oklahoma City, and all parties to this Contract, and any public trust participating in the Project, as additional insureds without reservation or restriction. All liability policies must provide that with respect to claims involving any insured, each such interest shall be deemed separate for any and all other interest herein and coverage shall apply as though each such interest was separately insured. A no claims made insurance coverage or policy may be accepted; however if any insurance is written in a “claims-made” form, the Contractor must also provide tail coverage that extends a minimum of one year from the expiration of this Contract.

Any deductibles or self-insured retentions in excess of $25,000, or any scheme other than a fully insured coverage of general liability, automobile liability and/or employer’s liability must be requested by the Contractor and formally approved in advance by the City. At the option of the City, approval of deductibles or self-insured retention may be conditioned upon: (1) the Contractor must require the insurer to reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions with respect to the City; or (2) the Contractor must procure a irrevocable letter of credit naming the City as a loss payee or bond guaranteeing payment of the losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses not otherwise covered by the


Contractor’s insurance because of deductibles or self-insurance retentions; or (3) the Contractor must provide owner’s protection liability coverage with the City, and all other parties to this Contract and parties participating in the Project or Program, each as the named insured, for the commercial general liability requirement, in a combined single-limit bodily injury and property damage amount of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000.00). However, the City is not required to approve any deductibles or self-insured retentions.

The insurance coverage and limits required must be evidenced by properly executed certificates of insurance on the form furnished by The City or on forms approved by the Oklahoma Insurance Commissioner. The Contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager current copies of certificates of insurance required below with its signed Contract and Bonds. The certificates must include the Project number and Project description. The certificates must also be signed by the authorized representative of the insurance company(s) and must be accompanied by proof that the person signing is an authorized representative thereof. In addition, certified, true and exact copies of all insurance policies and endorsements providing the required insurance coverage shall be provided to the City on a timely basis if requested by the City Engineer or Project Manager. The required insurance coverage and policies shall be performable in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, and shall be construed in accordance with the laws of Oklahoma.

In the event of a reduction in any aggregate insurance coverage or limits below the coverage required, the Contractor shall take immediate steps to have the full amount of the required insurance coverage reinstated. If at any time the City requests a written statement from the insurance company(s) as to any impairment to the aggregate coverage or limits, the Contractor hereby agrees to promptly authorize and have delivered to the City such statement. The Contractor shall remove or cover any impairment to insurance coverage as soon as known to it. The Contractor authorizes the City to confirm with the Contractor’s insurance agents, brokers, surety and/or insurance carriers all information necessary to confirm or evidence the Contractor’s compliance with bonding and insurance requirements. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary to any insurance or self-insurance program carried by the City.

There may be no termination, non-renewal or modification of such insurance coverage or policy without at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to the City, in conformance with the provisions of this Contract. Any notification of cancellation, termination, non-renewal or modification must be submitted to the Project Manager and shall include the Project number in the reference line. The Contractor must provide a covenant from the insurance agent that the insurance agent will provide the City and any participating public trust with such thirty (30) days advanced written notice as described above. No notice to proceed, work order, occupancy of the premises, or payment for any work shall be provided unless and until the required insurance policy and coverage have been obtained and certificates of insurance are provided and insurance coverage is in effect.

The minimum amounts of such insurance policy and continuing coverage shall be:

Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain, during the term of the Contract, Worker's Compensation Insurance as prescribed by the laws of the state of Oklahoma and Employer's Liability Insurance for


all its, employees employed at the site of the Project, and in case any work is subcontracted, the Contractor shall require the subcontractor similarly to provide Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance for all the subcontractor's employees, unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor. In the event any class of employees engaged in work performed under the Contract or at the site of the Project is not protected under such insurance heretofore mentioned, the Contractor shall provide and shall cause each subcontractor to provide adequate, Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability insurance for the protection of the employees not otherwise protected.

Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide and maintain commercial general liability insurance coverage not less than the greater of the following amounts: (1) $1,000,000; (2) the maximum cumulative liability of the City, all parties to this Contract, and any public trust participating in the Project under the Governmental Tort Claims Act (51 O.S. § 151 et seq.) and any amendment or addition thereto; or (3) the minimum amount required by the Contractor’s prequalification classification. The current required minimum commercial general liability coverage for each entity under the GTCA is $175,000 per person for bodily injury or death, $25,000 for property damage and $1,000,000 for any number of claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence.

Automobile Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide and maintain comprehensive automobile liability insurance coverage as to the ownership, maintenance, and use of all owned, non-owned, leased or hired vehicles not less than the greater of the following amounts: (1) $1,000,000; (2) the maximum cumulative liability of the City, all parties to this Contract, and any public trust participating in the Project under the Governmental Tort Claims Act (51 O.S. § 151 et seq.) and any amendment or addition thereto; or (3) the minimum amount required by the Contractor’s prequalification classification. The current required minimum commercial general liability coverage for each entity under the GTCA is $175,000 per person for bodily injury or death, $25,000 for property damage and $1,000,000 for any number of claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence.

The requirements of the insurance provisions listed above shall survive the completion, expiration, cancellation or termination of this Contract. All policies, unless specified otherwise, shall remain in full force and effect during this Contract, during the construction of the Project, and for a period of two (2) years after the final, formal acceptance of this Project by the City.

The lapse of any of the insurance policy or coverage required by this Contract is a breach of this Contract. The City may at its option suspend this Contract until there is full compliance with this paragraph, or may cancel or terminate this Contract and seek damages for the breach of this Contract. The remedies in this paragraph shall not be deemed to waive or release any remedy available to the City. The City expressly reserves the right to pursue and enforce any other cause or remedy in equity or at law.

Nothing in this provision defines or limits the responsibilities and duties of the Contractor under any other provision of this Contract, including but not limited to any indemnification provision.


Nothing in this insurance provision shall define or limit the rights of the City or any party to this Contract or any public trust participating in the Project under any other provision of this Contract, including but not limited to any indemnification provision.

18. Bonds. As required by and in accordance with the Bidding Documents the successfulBidder shall furnish bonds. The bonds must be submitted on the forms, or photocopies thereof,provided in the Bidding Documents. All bonds must be provided by a Surety authorized to dobusiness in the State of Oklahoma. The bonds are Performance Bond, Statutory Bond,Maintenance Bond and, whenever applicable, Defect Bond, and are particularly described in theStandard Specifications.

18.1. Performance Bond. A properly executed Performance Bond in favor of the City of Oklahoma City, and any participating Trust, on the form provided in the Bidding Documents must be submitted with the Contract. Generally, the Performance Bond shall guarantee the Contractor’s full and faithful execution of the work and performance of the Contract in accordance with the Contract, and any Change Order or Amendment to the Contract, and provide for the protection of the City and all property owners against any damage by reason of acts or omissions of the Contractor or the improper execution of the work or the use of inferior materials.

18.2 Statutory Bond. A properly executed Statutory Bond on the form provided in the Bidding Documents must be submitted with the Contract. The Statutory Bond shall provide that the Contractor will make payment for all labor, materials and equipment used in the construction of the project. The Statutory Bond shall be made in favor of the State of Oklahoma and subcontractors, and all suppliers of labor, material, rented machinery or equipment, and repair of and parts for equipment used or consumed in the performance of the contract.

18.3 Maintenance Bond. A properly executed Maintenance Bond on the form provided in the Bidding Documents must be submitted with the Contract. The Maintenance Bond shall be in favor of the City of Oklahoma City, and any participating Trust, and shall be for a period of ( 2 ) years. The bond for the term of this Contract will be in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract amount.

18.4. Defect Bond. If applicable, a properly executed Defect Bond on the form provided in the Bidding Documents must be submitted with the Contract. The Defect Bond shall be in favor of the City of Oklahoma City, and any participating Trust, and the term shall be the same duration as the Maintenance Bond. The Defect Bond will be in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract amount for the term of the bond. The Contractor will provide a properly executed Defect Bond provided by a surety authorized to do business in the State of Oklahoma if the Contractor has not complied with the provision 1, 2, 3, or 4 below:

18.4.1 The Contractor has not shown proof of his intentions to perform and maintain for the specified period of maintenance bond tenure, by establishing within a forty (40) mile radius of the office of the City Engineer, 420 W. Main Street, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, a business address (as defined in the Oklahoma City Municipal Code) with a telephone (staffed by competent employees approved by the City Engineer under who supervision the work will be


performed), and a yard (as defined in the Oklahoma City Municipal Code) equipped with sufficient necessary equipment available 24 hours-a-day to perform and maintain all classes of work for which the Contractor is pre-qualified to bid. This office and yard as equipped shall have been established prior to the time the applicant submits his application for qualification; or,

18.4.2. Contractor opting to have the City retain a sum equal to 15% of the total Contract amount for the extent of the maintenance period (said funds may be used by the City to insure compliance with the maintenance obligations of the City); or

18.4.3 Contractor opting to provide a properly executed Defect Bond on a form provided by the City and issued by a surety authorized to do business in the state of Oklahoma; or

18.4.4 Contractor acting in a joint venture with a Pre-qualified person which meets the requirements of the City Prequalification Review Board Policy Joint Ventures adopted December 11, 2019, or as amended.

The Defect Bond guarantees the Contractor shall timely repair any defect and maintain or provide for the timely maintenance of any repair on the project for a specified term. The term of the Defect Bond shall be as provided in the Special Provisions and in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract amount. The Defect Bond shall be made in favor of the City of Oklahoma City.

19. Time of Completion. Work on this project shall commence immediately following theNotice to Proceed with and estimated Completion Date of May 7, 2022 (180 Calendar Days).The Notice to Proceed will be issued on November 9, 2021. In the event that the City gives aNotice to Proceed past the date above, the City may change the Completion Date accordingly.The rate of progress shall be such that the whole Work will be performed in accordance with theContract Documents, Plans, Specifications and approved Change Orders and Amendments andthe premises be cleaned within the time stated herein, unless an Extension of Completion Date isapproved by the City Engineer in the manner hereinafter specified.

19.1 Flex Start. The Contractor may submit a written request for up to a sixty (60) day Flex Start date prior to Award of Contract. If the request is granted by the City Engineer, the Completion Date will be adjusted by Change Order in accordance with 108.03 in the Standard Specifications. Flex Start will begin on the date of Award of Contract.

19.2 Extension of Completion Date. The Contractor may request an extension in time when a delay occurs which is beyond the Contractor’s control. A claim for such extension must be submitted to the City Engineer in writing by the Contractor within seven (7) days from and after the time when the alleged cause of delay occurred.

If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for extension of the completion date, such claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the construction activities occurring on the critical path of the construction schedule.


Any Extension of Completion Date for adverse weather will only be approved for time only, no additional charges, costs or compensation, in any amount, for the contractor or subcontractors will be considered.

If the satisfactory execution and completion of the Contract should require work or materials in greater amount or quantities than those set forth in the contract, then the Contract time may be increased.

In adjusting the time for completion of the project, all strikes, lockouts, unusual delays in transportation or any condition over which the Contractor has no control unless and except delays by a subcontractor deemed to be within the control of the Contractor and any suspensions of activities ordered by the City Engineer for causes not the fault of the Contractor shall be excluded from the computation of the Contract time for the completion of the work. No allowance shall be made for delays or suspensions of the prosecution of the work due to the fault of the Contractor.

19.3 Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall perform construction scheduling and phasing/sequencing required to perform the work as indicated in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall develop the construction schedule for the project in order to establish a chronological and logical order for the scheduling of construction and related activities. The schedule shall graphically illustrate a series of activities including project start, description of project activities, relationships and time required for completion. The maximum duration for any single activity shall not exceed thirty (30) days.

The schedule must establish the critical path for completion of the project from the Notice to Proceed through Final Acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall provide a preliminary schedule and a final schedule of the project for review by the Consultant and City Engineer.

Within fourteen (14) calendar days following the Pre-Work meeting, the Contractor shall submit the construction schedule indicating a comprehensive overview of the project including all major activities necessary to complete the work. The Consultant and City Engineer will consider acceptance of the construction schedule once the Contractor has incorporated all comments.

The construction schedule must be updated monthly and submitted with each request for payment. Claims for payment for work performed will not be processed until the monthly updated schedule is received. Any significant change to the project sequencing must be submitted for acceptance by the City Engineer.

The number of lost days a contractor should expect during an average year for exterior weather sensitive activities has been determined. The figures are based on the number of days each month that receive precipitation greater than ½-inch and/or snowfall over one inch. No days have been included for drying time, below freezing temperatures or temperatures below what is specified for the placement of materials. The number of lost days shall be reconciled by the Architect/Engineer and City Engineer as requested by the Contractor at the end of each month.


Days Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Lost 8 7 5 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 4 7

The lost weather days shall be included in the schedule for the normal five-day work week (excluding weekends and holidays) for the duration of the project. Weather days exceeding lost days may be submitted for approval to the Architect/Engineer and City Engineer, which may extend the completion date for the project. Refer to the Standard Specification section 111.06 for Day’s Work and Working Hours.

Schedule float is defined as the amount of time an activity can slip past its duration without delaying the overall project. Float is not owned by the Contractor. The use of float by the City or any other parties shall not be deemed as justification for an extension of time on the project or cause delay to the Contractor in completing the work.

19.4 Conformance to Schedule. The Contractor shall conform to all submitted and accepted construction schedules. In the event that a construction schedule has not been accepted by the Architect/Engineer and City Engineer, the most recently submitted or accepted construction schedule shall be utilized in planning work activities. The City shall not be responsible for any delays to work or changes to the construction schedule in the absence of an accepted construction schedule.

In the event that the Contractor is not able to conform to the latest submitted or accepted construction schedule, a recovery schedule shall be developed and submitted with the next monthly schedule update. The recovery schedule shall be considered a revision to the schedule that must be approved by the Architect/Engineer and City Engineer. The recovery schedule must show completion of the project within the time allowed on the project unless the City Engineer grants an extension of time.

19.5. Substantial Completion: A project is considered substantially complete when the following items have been performed.

19.5.1 The work and/or designated phases of construction, as identified in the Contract Documents, is functionally complete and can be fully utilized for the intended purpose including any field changes, substitutions, change orders, amendments, and agreement of quantities approved in accordance with Standard Specification section 108.03. 19.5.2 A Substantial Completion Walk-through has been performed and a list of incomplete or defective work has been identified, itemized and included on the punch list. 19.5.3 Contractor will submit final quantities and as-built drawings to Engineer of Record for processing. 19.5.4 The City Engineer will issue a letter of Substantial Completion.

19.6 Completion of Punch List. When a Project is declared Substantially Complete, the Contractor must complete the Punch List within thirty (30) Calendar days. Liquidated damages will be assessed for each day beyond the thirty (30) Calendar days in accordance with 111.09 of the Standard Specifications. Extension of the thirty (30) Calendar days to complete the Punch List due to adverse weather conditions is limited to actual lost days.


19.7 Final Acceptance. Prior to final acceptance and release of retainage by the awarding public agency the following must be complete: 19.7.1 A final walk-through has been performed verifying all items are complete. 19.7.2 A directory containing the firm name of each subcontractor and material supplier on the project, subcontractor’s and material suppliers address, telephone number, and representative to contact for repair and/or maintenance.

19.8 Time is of the Essence Both the City and the Contractor expressly agree that time is of the essence with respect to this Project. Progress and completion of construction in a timely manner is necessary to limit inconvenience and improve safety to the public.

19.9 Interruption of Work Once construction operations commence within the Project limits, Work shall continue on each available Work Day (as defined in Section 111.06 of the Standard Specification) without interruption until all Work is substantially completed. The use of the term Work Day does not change a Project to a Working Day Project.

Non-performance of Work on available Working Days (not related to weather conditions and without prior written authorization from the City Engineer) will result in the assessment of Liquidated Damages on each occurrence for any interruption of work in excess of three (3) consecutive days, in accordance with the Standard Specification or the Special Provisions for the project. This assessment will be in addition to any Liquidated Damages which may or may not be due the City for non-completion of the Project prior to the specified Completion Date.

20. Verification and Inspection of Payroll Records. The Contractor shall keep weeklyrecords; permits inspection of records; and certify and provide copies of payroll records andcontracts and subcontracts. Example forms are available from the Public Works Department forthe convenience of the Contractor.

21. Prequalification Waived in Favor of Required Special Questionnaire and OtherAdditional Submissions. The requirements of the Ordinance No. 26,614 approved by CityCouncil on December 8, 2020, are waived (for the purpose of bidding only) for this project.All other requirements of the prequalification ordinance (working in a public right-of-way)are not waived. In lieu of prequalification, Bidder is required to submit other evidence ofknowledge and experience relating to Bidder's ability to perform or manage the workrequired for this project. The special questionnaire form is included in the BiddingDocuments and must be properly completed and submitted with the Bid. Failure toproperly complete the form may be cause for the Bid to be recommended for rejection.

All Sub-Contractors performing work within a prequalification classification category must be prequalified prior to beginning work.

22. Small and Disadvantaged Local Business Subcontracting Program. The City ofOklahoma City has adopted a program to encourage and promote the use of small and


disadvantaged local businesses as subcontractors on public construction contracts as set forth in the Oklahoma Public Competitive Bidding Act. The successful bidder awarded a public improvement contract by the City must provide the City a small and disadvantaged local business subcontracting plan setting forth the Contractor’s efforts and strategies to provide and extend opportunities for small and disadvantaged local business participation in the performance of subcontracts on City projects. The Contractor’s plan must be submitted to the City Engineer before a notice to proceed with work will be issued. The plan must set forth the Contractor’s outreach efforts and internal efforts. The Contractor must create and maintain records demonstrating its efforts and the success of its efforts. The Contractor must provide a report on the progress and success of its small and disadvantaged local business subcontracting plan to the City Engineer as a condition precedent to final payment and release of retainage. The project will neither be deemed substantially complete nor be accepted for final payment until the Contractor submits a report on the progress and success of its small and disadvantaged local business subcontracting plan. Provided, however, on emergency projects, the public construction contractor may be permitted to submit its small and disadvantaged local business subcontracting plan after the issuance of the notice to proceed.

23. Construction Stakes and Survey. The City Engineer shall furnish the Contractor withpermanent horizontal and vertical alignment points for field control throughout the Project limits.Permanent benchmarks shall be provided within two hundred (200) feet of the beginning and endof the Work.

All other horizontal or vertical controls not specifically noted, but required for proper completion of the Work, shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish staking unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions. If there is not a Bid line item for payment on Construction Stakes and Surveying, paragraphs 23.8, 23.9 and 23.10. are not applicable.

23.1 Construction staking shall consist of furnishing, placing and maintaining construction stakes or marks as necessary to establish lines and grades required for completion of the Work.

23.2 Field control shall be provided by the City Engineer prior to the Work commencing. The Contractor shall exercise care in the preservation of previously placed stakes and bench marks and shall have them reset at the Contractor’s expense when damaged, lost, displaced or removed. Bridge centerline, horizontal, and vertical control shall be set by the City Engineer.

23.3 The Contractor shall use personnel and equipment suitable for all construction staking required. The Contractor shall provide all necessary stakes such as: offset, reference point, slope, pavement, curb line and grading stakes. Stakes for bridges, sewers, water lines, drainage facilities, gutter line, culverts, and other structures shall be provided to ensure correct layout of the Work. Stakes for line and grade shall be adequate to maintain the required tolerances for the Work. The station number and distance from the centerline of construction shall be marked on all grade stakes.

23.4 When grading quantities are to be paid by field measure, the Contractor shall furnish both original and final cross section field notes. Field notes shall be the basis of partial payments for work completed. Final field measured quantities shall be paid according to survey field notes.


Where discrepancies occur, the decision of the City Engineer is final.

23.5 The Contractor shall furnish the original survey records to the City Engineer for permanent files. These records shall be furnished as completed during the progress of the Work. Records shall be maintained in permanently bound field books and/or level books and formatted in a manner commonly accepted by the surveying profession or digital files acceptable to the City Engineer.

23.6 The Contractor shall, upon request by the City Engineer, provide daily survey notes and cut sheets to assist the City Engineer in checking correctness of the construction staking. When significant errors occur, the Contractor shall re-survey to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. The Contractor shall provide, at the Contractor’s expense, proper and safe access for checking the construction staking. Any inspection or verification by the City Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of the total Work to be performed.

23.7 The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer when plan errors require deviations from the specified elevations or horizontal locations.

23.8 Measurement for construction staking shall be based on estimated Work completed.

23.9 Payment for construction staking shall be lump sum, which shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work as specified.

23.10 Partial payments for lump sum Contracts shall follow the schedule below:

25% of lump sum on first estimate 50% of lump sum on 10 percent complete Work and Original Survey

Record submitted to date 75% of lump sum on 50 percent complete Work and Original Survey

Record submitted to date 95% of lump sum on 75 percent complete Work and Original Survey

Record submitted to date 100 percent when all field books and records are furnished to the City Engineer

24. Storm Water Construction Activities Permit (delete this paragraph if not required)

In order for the City of Oklahoma City to remain in compliance with the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality (ODEQ) regulations, and maintain its own NPDES permit, the City must ensure all construction activities within its corporate boundaries are in compliance under the following regulations:

Environmental Protection Agency Code of Federal Regulations (40 CFR, Part 122) Clean Water Act Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality

Oklahoma Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Act (OPDES) 27A O.S. 2-6-201 ODEQ General Permit OKR10 City of Oklahoma City Oklahoma City Municipal Code

A copy of the City’s Best Management Practices Manual can be downloaded at http://www.okc.gov/pw/storm.html or a copy can be picked up at the City of Oklahoma City’s City Clerk's Office, 200 N. Walker, 2nd Floor, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73102.

As a part of this project the contractor will be required to submit a completed Notice of Intent (NOI), a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and an Erosion Control Site Plan for permitting purposes. The Contractor shall be required to follow the plans as submitted and approved at all times during construction of the project. Along with the above stated items the Contractor shall also provide a check payable to the City of Oklahoma City in an amount required by this project. This permit must be issued before the Contractor will be allowed to obtain the building/construction permit. Permits issued may be renewed annually upon filing of a renewal application and payment of permit fee, provided that the applicant’s activity, and the location where it is carried on are the same as originally permitted. In addition, the application for renewal shall be subject to all the requirements pertaining to original permit. (Oklahoma City Municipal Code 48-33)

The following note shall be on every plan submitted to the City of Oklahoma City:

Construction activities that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one (1) acre, or less than one (1) acre if they are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that totals at least one (1) acre must also obtain a permit from ODEQ (form 605-002a) for Storm Water Discharge from Construction Activities. This means that land disturbing of one (1) acre or more must permit with ODEQ and the City of Oklahoma City, Storm Water Quality.

25. Lowest and best responsible bidder will be determined by the sum of the Base Bid and suchalternates accepted by the City at its discretion. The City reserves the right to award all, some, ornone of the alternates.

http://www.okc.gov/pw/storm.html


SPECIAL PROVISIONS – TECHNICAL

MP-0556 I-240 Sports Complex Renovations


SPECIAL PROVISIONS - TECHNICAL ARE TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONSULTING ARCHITECT/ENGINEER

SPECIAL PROVISIONS – TECHNICAL

MP-0556-R - I-240 SPORTS COMPLEX RENOVATION


Division 1 - General: No. of Pages 01000 Instruction to Bidders 2 01010 Contractor Qualifications 2 01050 Field Engineering 2 01152 Application for Payment 2 01200 Project Meetings 2 01340 Submittals 6 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 2 01510 Site Access 4 01573 Tree Protection 10 01720 Project Record Documents 4

Division 2 - Site Work: 02000 Site Work 2 02070 Selective Demolition 2 02100 Site Preparation 3 02211 Rough Grading 2 02220 Earthwork 8 02265 Finish Grading 1 02400 Site Drainage 5 02934 Sodding 3

Division 3 - Concrete: 03100 Concrete Formwork 4 03210 Steel Reinforcement 3 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 9

033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete - Structural 19 03345 Concrete Finishing 2

Division 4 - Masonary: 04200 Unit Masonry 3

Division 5 - Metals: 05510 Metal Handrails 3 05500 Metal Fabrication 3 51200 Structural Steel Framing 10

Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection: 07900 Sealants

Division 9 – Finishes: 099123 Painting 6

Division 10 – Specialties: No. of Pages 10400 Large Matrix Display 7

Division 11 – Equipment: 116833 Athletic Field Equipment - Dugout Shade Structure 3

Division 26 – Electrical: 260050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 14 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables 6

260526 Grounding and Bounding for Electrical Systems 6

260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 6

260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 10

260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cables

4

260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 8

262726 Wiring Devices 6 262813 Fuses 4

262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 8 265619 LED Exterior Lighting 8

Division 31 – Earthwork: 312219 Softball Field Grading 8

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements 321243 Porous Flexible Paving 10 321321 Bollards 3 321800 Athletic and Recreational Surfacing 2 323000 Miscellaneous Athletic and Site Improvements 7 323113 Chain Link Fence, Gates, And Sportsfield Backstops 7 323119 Decorative Metal Fence 6 328400 Landscape Irrigation System 13

329200.1 Field Turf and Grasses 7 329219 Seeding 5 329300 Planting 5

Alternates 012300 Alternates 3

Section 01000 1 of 2

SECTION 01000

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Qualifications2. Prequalification3. Subcontractors/Suppliers/Others

B. Related Documents1. Document 004150 Contractor Qualifications

2.1 SITE ASSESSMENT

A. Site Examination1. Examine the project site before submitting a bid.

3.1 QUALIFICATIONS FOR SPORTS FIELD BUILDER

A. Definition of “Sports Field Portion of The work” - The sports field portion of the workdetermined to be the scope of qualifications for the sports field builder, either as theprime contractor or as sub-contractor shall include the following elements:1. Fine grading and preparation of the sub-grade after mass excavation2. All drainage elements specifically for the natural surface3. All new irrigation components and controls, pump, including plumbing to new

irrigation system4. Under field structural gravels, drainage gravels, and root zone blends5. All skin infield and warning track materials6. Finish grading and certification of grades prior to sodding/skin finishes7. New natural grass sod8. In ground sports equipment within the playing field area; bases, plates, foul poles

B. Evidence of Qualifications1. To demonstrate qualifications for performing the Work of this Contract, bidders

may be requested to submit written evidence of financial position, and license toperform work in the State.

SECTION 01000 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

Section 01000- 2 of 2

2. Prime contractors intending to self-perform the sports field portions of the work,or subcontractor performing the sports field portions of the work shall providethe following evidence as experience and capability.a. Must have successfully completed five (5) natural surface sports fields at the

4A high school or collegiate level, in the past three (3) years.b. Must have successfully completed two (2) 4A high school or collegiate level

baseball or softball fields, in the past three (3) years.NOTE: The same project can be used to meet one or more of the required cat-egorized criteria.

3. Must be a Member of American Sports Builders Association and/or Member ofthe Sports Turf Manager’s Association and/or Certified Sport’s Field Builderand/or Certified Sports Field Manager are required.

3.2 PREQUALIFICATION

A. Bidders shall complete and submit Contractor Qualification Section - 00 4150 to theArchitect on or before 12:00:00pm on the 28th day of October,2020 to be reviewed andconsidered.

B. The following Prime Contractors or Subcontractors are the only currently pre-qualifiedsubcontractors for the “sports field portions of the work” as defined above and asdetailed in the project documents.

1. List of Prime Contractors and Subcontractors to be issued as an addendum ata later time.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01010

CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

Firm Name _____________________________________________ Date Organized_________________

_____Partnership _____ Corporation

Address______________________________________________________________________________

City _________________________________ State ______________________ Zip Code ____________

Telephone Numbers (office) _____________________________ (mobile)_________________________

Number of years in business under the present name: _________________________________________

Former name(s) of firm: _________________________________________________________________

CLASSIFCATION: __ General __ Building __ Electrical __ HVAC __ Plumbing

__ Utilities __ Earthwork __ Paving __ Other

LIST FIVE (5) COMPLETED NATURAL SURFACE SPORTS FIELDS AT THE 4A HIGH SCHOOL OR COLLEGIATE LEVEL, IN THE PAST THREE (3) YEARS:

Amount of Con-tract Type of Work Date Completed Name and Telephone Number of

the Owner

SECTION 004150 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS


LIST TWO (2) COMPLETED 4A HIGH SCHOOL OR COLLEGIATE LEVEL BASEBALL OR SOFTBALL FIELDS, IN THE PAST THREE (3) YEARS:

Amount of Con-tract Type of Work Date Completed Name and Telephone Number of

the Owner

LIST OF CONSTRUCTION SUPERINTENDENT’S NAME, CERTIFICATION, CREDENTIALS AND CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE:

Superintendent’s Name Certification Credentials Construction

Experience

SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING

Section 01050-1 of 2

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for project.

1. Survey work required in execution of project. 2. Civil, structural or other professional engineering services specified, or

required to execute Contractor's construction methods. 3. Record drawings.

B. Owner's Representative will identify existing control points indicated on the

drawings as required.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR OR ENGINEER

A. Qualified engineer of registered land surveyor, acceptable to Contractor and Owner.

B. Registered professional engineer in the State of Oklahoma, of the discipline

required for the specific service required.

1.03 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on drawings.

B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and preserve all

permanent reference points during construction. 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Owner. 2. Report to Owner's Representative when any reference point is lost or

destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

1.04 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish a minimum of one permanent bench mark on each site, referenced to

data established by survey control points. 1. Record locations with horizontal and vertical data on project record

documents.

B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.

SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING


1. Site improvements:

a. Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement. b. Utility slopes for invert elevations.

2. Batter boards for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for Divisions 15 and 16.

C. From time to time, verify layouts by same methods.

1.05 RECORDS

A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name and address of surveyor and professional engineer to Owner's

Representative.

B. Submit certificates signed by registered surveyor certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or non-conformance with contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01152 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Comply with procedures described in this Section when applying for progress payment and final payment under the Contract.

B. Related work:

1. Proposal and contract documents.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prior to start of construction, secure the Owner's Representative's approval of the schedule of values required to be submitted.

B. During progress of the work, modify the schedule of values as approved by the

Owner's Representative to reflect changes in the contract sum due to change orders or other modifications of the Contract.

C. Base requests for payment on the approved schedule of values.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Informal submittal: If directed by the Owner's Representative:

1. Make an informal submittal of request for payment by filling in, with erasable pencil, pertinent portions of AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment", plus continuation sheet or sheets or other form as approved by the Owner.

2. Make this preliminary submittal to the Owner's Representative at the last regular job meeting of each month.

3. Revise the informal submittal of request for payment as agreed at the job meeting, initialing all copies.

B. Formal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative:

1. Make formal submittal of request for payment by filling in the agreed data, by typewriter or neat lettering in ink, on AIA Document G702, "Applica- tion and Certificate for Payment", plus continuation sheet or sheets, or other form as approved by Owner.

2. Sign and notarize the Application and Certificate for Payment and the City “Uniform Voucher and Invoice for Construction Services”.

3. Submit the original of the Application and Certificate of Payment plus three (3) identical copies of the continuation sheet or sheets to the Owner's Representative.

SECTION 01152 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT


4. The Owner's Representative will compare the formal submittal with the approved informal submittal and, when approved, will sign the Appli- cation and Certificate for Payment, make the required copies and distribute:

a. One original and two copies to Owner; b. One copy to Owner's Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: To enable orderly review during progress of the work and to provide for systematic discussion of problems, the Owner's Representative will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily

limited to, Proposal and Contract Documents and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. The Contractor's relations with his subcontractors and materials suppliers, and discussions relative thereto, are not the Owner's Representative responsibility and normally are not part of project meetings content.


A. For those persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in project meetings, provide required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon in the project meetings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Job notes:

1. The Owner's Representative will compile job notes of each project meeting and will furnish copies to the Contractor and to the Owner.

2. Recipients of copies may make and distribute such other copies as they wish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

No products are required in this Section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MEETING SCHEDULE

A. Except as noted below for Pre-construction Meeting, project meetings will be held

weekly. B. Coordinate as necessary to establish mutually acceptable schedule for meetings.

3.02 MEETING LOCATION

A. The Owner's Representative will establish meeting location. To the maximum

extent practicable, meetings will be held at the job site.

SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS


3.03 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. A Pre-construction meeting will be scheduled after issuing the Notice to Proceed. 1. Provide attendance by authorized representatives of the Contractor and

major subcontractors. 2. The Owner will advise other interested parties, including the Owner's

Representative, and request their attendance.

B. Minimum agenda: Data will be distributed and discussed on at least the following items. 1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and

those of subcontractors, materials suppliers and Owner's Representative. 2. Channels and procedures for communication. 3. Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work and closing of

any facilities. 4. Contract documents, including distribution of required copies of original

documents and revisions. 5. Processing of shop drawings and other data submitted to Owner's

Representative for review. 6. Rules and regulations governing performance of the work. 7. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping

and related matters. 8. Location of underground utilities. 9. Notification procedures for adjacent property owners.

3.04 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Attendance:

1. To the maximum extent practicable, assign the same person or persons to represent the Contractor at project meetings throughout progress of the work.

2. Subcontractors, materials suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those project meetings in which their aspect of the work is involved.

B. Minimum agenda:

1. Review, revise and approve job notes of previous meetings. 2. Review progress of the work since last meeting, including status of

submittals for approval. 3. Identify problems which impede planned progress. 4. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule. 5. Complete other current business.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01340 SUBMITTALS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Procedures:

1. Wherever possible throughout the Contract Documents the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined by manufacturer's name and catalog number, reference to recognized industry and government standards, or description of required attributes and performance.

2. To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for their review by the Owner's Representative and Owner.

3. Make all submittals required by the Contract Documents and revise and resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Schedule of values.

D. Shop drawings, product data and samples.

E. Manufacturer's instructions and certificates.

F. Submittal log.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Individual requirements for submittals are described in pertinent sections of these

Specifications.

B. Related work: Section 01410: Testing Laboratory Reports. Section 01700: Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents, Operating

and Maintenance Data, Warranties and Bonds.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Coordination of submittals: Before each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted and verify that each item, and the submittal for it, conforms in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Coordinate with other trades as required. By affixing the



Contractor's signature to each submittal, certify that this coordination has been performed.

B. Grouping of submittals: Unless otherwise specified, make all submittals in groups

containing all associated items to ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall be strictly liable for all delays so occasioned.

C. Timing: Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for

installation to provide all time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing deliveries.

D. Notify Owner's Representative in writing with submittal of any deviations in

submittals from Contract Document requirements.

E. Do no fabrication or work which requires submittals until accepted by the Owner's Representative.

1.04 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Compile a complete and comprehensive schedule of all submittals anticipated to be

made during progress of the work. Include a list of each type of item for which Contractor's drawings, shop drawings, certificates of compliance, material samples, guarantees or other types of submittals are required. Adhere to the schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted. Submittal log is for Owner's Representative and Owner to track review.

B. Coordinate the schedule with all necessary subcontractors and materials suppliers

to ensure their ability to adhere. Coordinate as required to ensure the grouping of submittals.

C. Revise and update the schedule on a monthly basis to reflect conditions and

sequences. Promptly submit revised schedules to Owner's Representative for review and comment.

1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Refer to Section 01370: Schedule of Values.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

A. Shop Drawings:



1. Present in clear and thorough manner, with details referenced to sheet,

detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. Provide quantity directed by Owner's Representative.

B. Product Data:

1. Preparation: Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. Show performance characteristics and capacities, dimensions and clearances required, and wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

2. Modify manufacturer's standard drawings, diagrams and literature to delete information not applicable to work and supplement information specifically applicable to the work.

C. Samples:

1. Office samples: Provide in quantity and size directed, complete with integrally related parts and attachment devices and illustrating functional characteristics of product and full range of color, texture and pattern.

2. Field samples/mock-ups: Erect at project site at location acceptable to Owner's Representative in size or area specified in other specification sections. Fabricate to be complete and finished. Remove at conclusion of work or when directed.

D. Make submittals promptly and in such sequence as to cause no delay in work.

E. Submission Requirements:

1. Quantity required: a. Shop drawings: One (1) unfolded reproducible transparency and

four (4) opaque reproductions. b. Submit five (5) index brochures of mechanical and electrical

submittals (manufacturer's literature and drawings) for final approval and distribution.

c. Product data: Submit five (5) copies each. Complete catalogs will not be acceptable. Manufacturer's regular catalog sheets will be acceptable if they indicate completely all specification requirements. When manufacturer's catalog sheets are submitted, material not directly connected with subject shall be completely lined out. Where drawings cover several sizes or types of construction, they shall clearly indicate size or type of construction to be used including a schedule identifying each piece of equipment. Sheets of submittals containing more than five different items of equipment shall be assembled in an index brochure.

2. Submittal contents: a. Submission date and dates of any previous submissions. b. Project title and number. c. Names of Contractor, supplier and manufacturer. d. Identification of product, with specification section number.



e. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. f. Applicable standards, such as ASTM, Federal Spec numbers, etc. g. Relation to adjacent or critical features of work or materials. h. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. i. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. j. Contractor certification of submittal review, to include product

verification, field measurements, quantities, coordination with adjacent equipment structural members, or architectural features, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of work and Contract Documents. Certification may be by stamp of approval or a letter of transmittal containing a statement to the effect that they have been reviewed. Uncertified submittals will be rejected.

F. Resubmission Requirements:

1. Make corrections or changes required by Owner's Representative and resubmit until accepted.

2. Shop drawings and product data: Revise and resubmit as specified for initial submittal; indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by Owner's Representative.

3. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 4. Resubmission of structural shop drawings and product data: Resubmit

finalized drawings and product data. File copy to Owner's Representative and Owner; field copy to field office. Resubmit all subsequent changes with changes and dates noted.

G. Distribution:

1. Distribute reproductions of shop drawings and product data which carry Owner's Representative and Owner's stamp of approval to job site and record documents file, other affected contractors, subcontractors and supplier or fabricator.

2. Distribute samples with Owner's Representative and Owner's stamp of approval as directed by Owner's Representative.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01350: Substitutions.

1.08 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. Submit certificates in accordance with requirements of each specification section.

1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01720 Project Record Documents.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES

A. Deliver submittals to Owner's Representative.

B. Transmit each item under Contractor's Standard Letter of Transmittal. Identify project, contractor, subcontractor, major supplier, pertinent drawing sheet and detail number and specification section number as appropriate. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.

C. Submit initial progress and submittal schedules within 15 days after execution of

Contract and schedule of values with first application for payment. Update with each Application for Payment reflecting changes since previous submittal.

D. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to work progress.

E. After Owner's Representation and Owner's review of submittal, revise and resubmit

as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal.

F. Distribute copies of review submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

3.02 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE REVIEW

A. Owner's Representative duties:

1. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature and indicate resubmittal requirements

or approval of submittal. 3. Submit to Owner for approval. 4. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission.

B. Review by the Owner's Representative shall not be construed as a complete check,

but only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors which may exist.

C. Authority to Proceed: The notations "Approved" or "Approved as Corrected"

authorizes the Contractor to proceed with fabrication, purchase, or both, of the



items so noted, subject to the revisions, required by the Owner's Representative review comments.

D. Revisions: Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Owner's

Representative and Owner.

E. Revisions after approval: When a submittal has been reviewed by the Owner, resubmittal for substitution of materials or equipment will not be considered unless accompanied by an acceptable explanation as to why the substitution is necessary.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the work including, but necessarily limited to: 1. Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity and telephone; 2. Field office for Contractor's personnel; 3. Sanitary facilities; 4. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades and canopies; 5. Temporary fencing of the construction site; 6. Project sign.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, Proposal and Contract Documents and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Except that equipment furnished by Subcontractors shall comply with requirements pertinent safety regulations, such equipment normally furnished by the individual trades in execution of their own portions of the work are not part of this Section.

3. Permanent installation and hookup of the various utility lines are described in other Sections of these Specifications.

1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout

progress of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 UTILITIES

A. Water: 1. Provide as necessary temporary piping and water supply and, upon

completion of the work, remove such temporary facilities.

B. Electricity: 1. Provide necessary temporary wiring and, upon completion of the work,

remove such temporary facility. 2. Provide and pay for electricity used in construction.

C. Heating: Provide and maintain heat necessary for proper conduct of operations

needed in the work.

SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


D. Telephone and Fax: 1. Contractor and superintendent to have cellular telephones accessible during

normal business hours. 2. Contractor to maintain telephone and fax service at the Contractor's primary

office to receive job correspondence. On-site fax not required.

2.02 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Contractor's facilities: 1. Contractor may at his discretion provide a field office building and sheds

adequate in size and accommodation for Contractor's offices, supply and storage.

2. Within the Contractor's facilities, provide enclosed space, for holding project meetings. Furnish with table, chairs and utilities.

B. Sanitary facilities:

1. Provide temporary sanitary facilities in the quantity required for use by all personnel.

2. Maintain in a sanitary condition at all times.

2.03 ENCLOSURES

A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs, steps, platforms, bridges and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with pertinent safety and other regulations.

2.04 TEMPORARY FENCING

A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary safety barricade

of design and type needed to prevent entry onto the work by the public.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL

A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the work.

B. Remove such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the work will

permit, or as directed by the Owner's Representative.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01510 SITE ACCESS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Work included: this information applies to situations in which a Contractor or his

representatives including, but not limited to, suppliers, subcontractors, employees and field engineers enter upon The Project property.

B. Related work:

Section 02000: Site Work. Section 02070: Selective Demolition. Section 02100: Site Preparation. Section 02220: Excavating, Backfilling & Compacting.


A. Upon approval by Owner for access, notify all pertinent personnel regarding

requirements of this information.

B. Require that all personnel who will enter upon property certify their awareness of and familiarity with the requirements of the Owner.

C. Tree protection in accordance with Section 02100.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Maintain an accurate record of the names and identification of all persons entering

upon Park property and permit periodic review of record by Owner and/or Owner's Representative.

B. Pre-construction photographs per Paragraph 1.07.

1.04 TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES

A. Vehicle and equipment access:

1. Provide protection for curbs, sidewalks, roads, parking, utilities and amenities over which trucks and equipment pass to reach work areas.

Contractor's vehicles: Limit the access of vehicles belonging to employees and all other vehicles entering upon Park property to use only the access route shown on the drawings. Do not permit vehicles to park on any other area of the property except in the areas so designated on the drawings.



1.05 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, two weeks in advance of any

proposed construction activity on Owner's property. Said notice does not constitute authority to proceed with work in the Park. Official notice of approval will be at the discretion of the Owner.

1.06 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND LANDSCAPE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all property and shall

protect carefully from disturbance or damage all said property witnessed or otherwise referenced their location and shall not move any item until directed.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any

character, during the prosecution of the work, resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in his manner or method of executing the work, or at any time due to defective work or materials.

C. The Contractor shall consult with the Owner regarding his work activities and shall

install any and all barriers, warning signs, fencing, property protection, access control or other devices to the satisfaction of the Owner and needed to provide for public safety and protection of Property.

D. When or where any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to property by or on

account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work or in consequence of the non-execution thereof by the Contractor, he shall restore, at his own expense, such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury was don, by repairing, rebuilding or otherwise restoring as may be directed by the Owner or he shall make good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner to the Owner.

E. Tree protection in accordance with Section 02100.

1.07 PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS OR VIDEO

A. Prior to work commencement, provide continuous color audio-video

recording taken over the entire area of the individual project work sites to serve as a record of pre-construction conditions. 1. The purpose of creating this record is to be able to fairly establish the

prework condition that the CONTRACTOR must protect or restore after the facilities are installed.

2. It is in the CONTRACTOR’s interest that this record be as inclusive as possible, to protect the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER from spurious claims of private and public property damaged by the CONTRACTOR’s



operations.

3. No construction shall begin prior to review and approval of the video covering the construction area by the CITY.

4. The CITY shall have the authority to reject video not conforming to the specifications and order that it be redone at no additional charge.

5. Reschedule unacceptable coverage within five (5) days after being notified.

6. The CITY shall designate those areas, if any, to be omitted from or added to the audio-video coverage.

7. Video recordings shall not be made more than thirty (30) days prior to construction in any area.

8. Tapes and written records shall become the property of the CITY.

1.08 CLEANING

A. Progress cleaning: 1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap,

debris, packaging and shipping material. Remove such items from premises weekly.

2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all materials stored on site, re-stack, tidy, or otherwise arrange in safe condition.

B. Final cleaning:

1. Completely remove resultant construction debris, particularly any loose rock or stone imported or uncovered during construction.

2. Broom clean paved areas on site. 3. Mow grass areas as directed which had not been under normal maintenance. 4. Repair any areas of turfing that have been damaged by construction

operations in accordance with Section 02935 Sodding. 5. Alleviate compacted turf areas if access has been over turf, but no turf has

to be placed. Compaction should be alleviated by a coring implement with 6" O.C. minimum coverage of 3" deep. Drag cores until leveled.

6. Often when fences are erected for protection, holes are left when fence posts are pulled. Holes should be filled with appropriate top soil and settled with water to grade.

1.09 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit to Owner a complete record drawing clearly indicating all work both

concealed and visible.

B. Information shall be tied to base line control data of the Owner and so noted on the



Owner's field books.

1.10 FINAL APPROVAL

A. Upon the completion of all work a final inspection must be made by the Owner to determine whether the work has been completed in accordance with the contract, plans and/or specifications.

B. When the work has been so completed the Owner will provide certification of same and forward to appropriate contracting authorities.

C. Acceptance by Owner shall not restrict or prohibit the rights provided for in regard

to latent defects, frauds or such gross mistakes as may amount to fraud or as regards the rights under any warranty guarantee.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: 1. Throughout progress of the work, maintain an accurate record of changes

in the Contract Documents as described in Article 3.01 below. 2. Upon completion of the work, transfer the recorded changes to a set of

Record Documents, as described in Article 3.02 below.

B. Related work: 1. Proposal and contract documents. 2. Other requirements affecting Project Record Documents may appear in

pertinent other Sections of these Specifications.


A. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Owner's Representative.

B. Accuracy of records:

1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly.

2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may relay reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents.

C. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has

occurred.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. The Owner's Representative's approval of the current status of Project Record Documents may be a prerequisite to the Owner's Representative approval of requests for progress payment and request for final payment under the Contract.

C. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, secure the Owner's

Representative's approval of the current status of the Project Record Documents.

D. Prior to submitting request for final payment, submit the final Project Record Documents to the Owner's Representative and secure his approval.




A. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents.

B. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data

to the Owner's Representative's approval. 1. Such means shall include, if necessary, in the opinion of the Owner's

Representative, removal and replacement of concealing materials. 2. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by

the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Job set: Promptly following receipt of the Owner Notice to Proceed, secure from the Owner's Representative at no charge to the Contractor one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract.

B. Final Record Documents: At a time nearing the completion of the work, secure

from the Owner's Representative at no charge to the Contractor one complete set of mylar transparencies of all Drawings in the Contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET

A. Immediately upon receipt of the job set described in Paragraph 2.01 above, identify each of the Documents with the title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET."

B. Preservation:

1. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions under which these activities will be performed, devise a suitable method for protecting the job set to the approval of the Owner's Representative.

2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by the Owner's Representative until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents.



3. Maintain the job set at the site of work as that site is designated by the Owner's Representative.

C. Making entries on Drawings:

1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required.

2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas

affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping

changes.

D. Make entries in the pertinent other Documents as approved by the Owner's Representative.

E. Conversion of schematic layouts:

1. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts and similar items is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precise physical layout. a. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject

to the Owner's Representative's approval. b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require

accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the Drawings.

2. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as are described in subparagraph 3.01 E. 1. above. a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain",

"galv. water" and the like. b. Show, by symbol note, the vertical location of the item ("under

slab", "in ceiling plenum", "exposed" and the like). c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related

reliably to the Specifications. 3. The Owner's Representative may, subject to Owner approval, waive the

requirements for conversion of schematic layouts where, in the Owner's Representative's judgement, conversion serves no useful purpose. However, do not rely upon waivers being issued except as specifically issued in writing by the Owner.

3.02 FINAL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual

information regarding all aspects of the work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation and examination.



B. Approval of recorded data prior to transfer: 1. Following receipt of the transparencies described in Paragraph 2.01 B.

above and prior to start of transfer of recorded data thereto, secure the Owner's Representative's approval of all recorded data.

2. Make required revisions.

C. Transfer of data to Drawings: 1. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to

the corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required. 2. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing a full description

of changes made during construction, and the actual location of items described in subparagraph 3.01 E. 1. above.

3. Call attention to each entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area or areas affected and mark set as " Record Document ".

4. Make changes neatly, consistently and with the proper media to assure longevity and clear reproduction.

5. Provide one complete set of the record documents at 11 x 17 inch format. D. Transfer of data to other Documents:

1. If the Documents other than Drawings have been kept clean during progress of the work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the Owner's Representative, the job set of those Documents other than Drawings will be accepted as final Record Documents.

2. If any such Document is not so approved by the Owner's Representative, secure a new copy of that Document from the Owner's Representative at the Owner's Representative's usual charge for reproduction and handling and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval of the Owner's Representative.

E. Review and submittal:

1. Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents to the Owner's Representative as described in Paragraph 1.03 D. above.

2. Participate in review meetings as required. 3. Make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record

Documents to the Owner's Representative.

3.03 CHANGES SUBSEQUENT TO ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor has no responsibility for recording changes in the work subsequent to Final Completion, except for changes resulting from work performed under Warranty.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02000 SITE WORK


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. These general site work requirements apply to all site work operations. Refer toDivision 2 specification sections for specific general, product and executionrequirements.

B. Related work:Section 01510: Site Access. Section 02070: Selective Demolition. Section 02100: Site Preparation. Section 02220: Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.


A. Comply with all applicable local, state and federal requirements regardingmaterials, methods of work and disposal of excess and waste materials.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Locate and identify existing underground and overhead services and utilities withincontract limit work areas. Provide adequate means of protection of utilities andservices designated to remain. Repair utilities damaged during site work operationsat Contractor's expense.

B. Arrange for disconnection, disconnect and seal or cap all utilities and servicesdesignated to be removed before start of site work operations. Perform all work inaccordance with the requirements of the applicable utility company or agencyinvolved.

C. When uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping or other utilities andservices are encountered during site work operations, notify the applicable utilitycompany immediately to obtain procedure directions. Cooperate with the applicableutility company in maintaining active services in operation. If the services areOwner maintained, notify Owner's Representative immediately.

D. Locate, protect and maintain bench marks, monuments, control points and projectengineering reference points. Re-establish disturbed or destroyed items atContractor's expense.

E. Perform site work operations and the removal of debris and waste materials toassure minimum interference with streets, walks and other adjacent facilities.

SECTION 02000 SITE WORK


F. Give the owner 24 hour advanced notice to close or obstruct street, walks and adjacent facilities. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways.

G. Control dust caused by the work. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with

pollution control regulations of governing authorities.

H. Protect existing buildings, paving and other services or facilities on site and adjacent to the site from damage caused by site work operations. Cost of repair and restoration of damaged items at Contractor's expense.

I. Protect and maintain street lights, utility poles and services, traffic signal control

boxes, curb boxes, valves and other services, except items designated for removal. Remove or coordinate the removal of traffic signs, parking meters and postal mail boxes with the applicable governmental agency. Provide for temporary relocation when required to maintain facilities and services in operation during construction work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which site work is performed. Do not

proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Consult the records and drawings of adjacent work and of existing services and utilities which may affect site work operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Carefully demolish and remove from the site those items

scheduled to be demolished and removed.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily

limited to Proposal and Contract Documents and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 01510: Site Access.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. By careful study of the Contract Documents, determine the location and extent of

selective demolition to be performed.

B. Visit the site and verify the extent and location of selective demolition required. 1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition. 2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workmen also to identify items

to be removed and items to be left in place intact.

C. Prepare and follow an organized plan for demolition and removal of items. 1. Shut off, cap and otherwise protect existing public utility lines in

accordance with the requirements of the public agency or utility having jurisdiction.

2. Completely remove items scheduled to be so demolished and removed, leaving surfaces clean, solid and ready to receive new materials specified elsewhere.

SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


3. In all activities, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental

agencies having jurisdiction.

D. Demolished material shall be considered to be property of the Contractor and shall be completely removed from the job site unless otherwise specified.

E. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to

neighborhoods and to other work being performed on or near the site.

3.02 REPLACEMENTS

A. In the event of demolition of items not so scheduled to be demolished, promptly replace such items to the approval of the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Perform site preparation work as shown and specified. The work includes: 1. Protecting existing trees to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Removing designated site improvements.

B. Related work:

Section 01510: Site Access.


A. Comply with Section 02000 Site Work requirements.

B. Notify all contractor employees and subcontractors of provisions of this Section.

C. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials and equipment: As selected by the contractor except as noted.

B: Tree protection: 1. Wood fencing, snow fencing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TREE PROTECTION

A. Protect existing trees scheduled to remain against injury or damage, including

cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, trunks or branches; smothering by stockpiled construction materials, excavated materials or vehicular traffic within branch spread. 1. Protect designated trees with temporary wood or vinyl snow fence

enclosure. Provide a minimum 12'-0" radius from center of tree trunk. Increase enclosure size as directed for large trees up to and including the drip line.

2. Erect temporary fencing before commencing site preparation work. Maintain fencing during full construction period. Remove temporary fencing when acceptable to Owner's Representative.



4. Repair trees scheduled to remain and damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. Repair damaged trees promptly to prevent progressive deterioration caused by damage.

5. Replace trees scheduled to remain and damaged beyond repair by construction operations as determined by the Owner's Representative with trees of similar size and species of equal dollar value. Cost for tree replacement shall be determined in accordance with the "Guide for Establishing The Value of Trees and Other Plants", published by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers.

6. Tree replacement as required by paragraph 5 shall be in accordance with Specification Section 02900 Planting.

7. Replacement of trees scheduled to remain and damaged by construction operations during construction operations, and securing an opinion as to the tree or plant's health and its value, shall be at contractor's expense.

8. Tree loss appraisal shall be in accordance with the "Guide for Establishing the Values of Trees and Other Plants", by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers.

3.02 CLEARING

A. Locate and suitably identify trees and improvements indicated to remain.

B. Clear and grub areas within contract limits as required for site and execution of the

work.

C. Remove trees as designated on the plans with the approval of the Owner's Representative.

3.03 STRIPPING TOPSOIL

A. Strip topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches in all areas to be re-graded, resurfaced

or paved within contract limit work area. Additional topsoil can be stripped if need to achieve an adequate quantity fro all lawn and planting areas.

B. Stockpile topsoil in a location acceptable to the Owner's Representative for use in

finish grading and preparation of lawns and planting beds. 1. Grade and slope stockpiles for proper drainage and to prevent erosion. 2. No topsoil shall be removed from the site.

C. Protect all areas which are not to be resurfaced or re-graded and adjacent areas

outside of the contract limits from damage due to site preparation work.



3.04 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Existing Utilities 1. Information on the drawings relating to existing utility lines and services is

from the best sources presently available. All such information is furnished only for information and is not guaranteed. Excavate test pits as required to determine exact locations of existing utilities.

2. Call Okie for utility staking not City owned. 3. Call Owner's Representative to coordinate City maintained utility staking.

3.05 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Stockpile, haul from site and legally dispose of waste materials and debris.

Accumulation is not permitted.

B. Maintain disposal routes clear, clean and free of debris.

C. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials is allowed with proper permit and burn pit.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of site preparation work, clean area within contract limits, remove

tools and equipment. Provide site clear, clean and free of materials and debris and suitable for site work operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02211 ROUGH GRADING


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Removal and stockpiling of topsoil and subsoil. B. Cutting, grading, filling and rough contouring the site.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01410 - Quality Control 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing fill compaction. B. Section 021010 - Site Preparation. C. Section 02220 - Excavating, Backfilling & Compaction. D. Section 02265 - Finish Grazing: Finish grading with topsoil to contours.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Relations of soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop. B. ANSI/ASTM D 1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. C. ANSI/ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 inch Drop.

1.04 PROJECT RECORDS DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of section 01700. B. Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining, by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slops gradients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Off-Site Fill: Off-site fill shall be material with plasticity index less than 18 and shall

contain at least 15% fines (material passing #200 sieve.)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3. 01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions. B. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines. levels. Contours, and datum. B. Identity known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Notify utility company as necessary to remove and relocate utilities. D. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

E. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

F. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.03 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.

SECTION 02211 ROUGH GRADING


B. Stockpile in area designated on site. Remove excess topsoil not being reused, from site. C. Do not excavate wet topsoil. D. Stockpile to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Cover to protect from erosion.

3.04 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded. B. Stockpile in area designated on site. Remove excess subsoil not being reused, from site. C. Do not excavate wet subsoil. D. Stockpile subsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Cover to protect from erosion. E. When excavation through roots is necessary, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

3.05 FILLING

A. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials

B. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compacted to 95 percent.

C. Subsoil and Topsoil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 9 inches

compacted depth compacted to 95 percent.

D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. F. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. G. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot.

3. 07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410.

B. Tests and analysis of fill materials will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 D1557 and with Section 01410.

C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D968 and with Section 01410.

D. If test indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest at no cost to owner.

E. Frequency of Test: 50 feet on center.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02220 EARTHWORK


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Excavate, backfill, compact and grade the site to the elevations shown on the drawings as specified herein and as needed to meet the requirements of the construction shown in the Contract Documents.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, Proposal and Contract Documents and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 01510: Site Access.



B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity and numbers to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Fill and backfill materials: 1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances,

containing no rocks or lumps over 6” in greatest dimension and with not more than 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 2-1/2” in their greatest dimension.

2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the Owner’s Representative and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly granular, non-expansive soils free from roots and other deleterious matter.

3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1” in the upper 12” of fill or embankment.

4. Where fill material is required to build up a building pad and/or under building slabs, provide select low PI material. Select fill material used should be free of organic or other deleterious matters, have a maximum particle size of three (3) inches, and have a liquid limit less than thirty-five



(35) and a plasticity index between six (6) and twelve (12) and consist of sandy clays or clayey sands.

5. Where granular base is called for under building slabs, provide aggregate complying with requirements of Section 03300 of these Specifications.

2.02 TOPSOIL

A. Where shown on the drawings or otherwise required, provide topsoil consisting of

friable fertile soil of loamy character containing a minimum of 2% decayed organic matter (humus) normal to the region, capable of sustaining healthy plant life and reasonably free from subsoil, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 1” in greatest dimension, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter and other deleterious matter.

B. Obtain topsoil from sources within the project limits or provide imported topsoil obtained from sources outside the project limits or from both sources.

2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for complete and

proper installation as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Utilities: Refer to Section 2000 Site Work. B. Protection of persons and property:

1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the work and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

C. De-watering:

1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and sub-structure work to an approved location by pumps, drains and other approved methods.

2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water.

D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors and to other work being performed on or near the site.



E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times.

3.02 EXCAVATING

A. Perform unclassified excavating of every type of material encountered within the

limits of the work to the lines, grades and elevations indicated and specified herein. B. Excavation of rock:

1. Where rocks, boulders, or similar material is encountered and where such material cannot be removed or excavated by conventional earth moving or ripping equipment, take required steps to proceed with the general grading operations of the work and remove or excavate such material by means which will neither cause additional cost to the Owner nor endanger buildings or structures whether on or off the site.

2. Do not use explosives without written permission from the Owner’s Representative.

3. The definition of “Rock Excavation” will apply as stated in the “Standard Specifications for Highway Construction”, Oklahoma Department of Transportation, edition of 1988 or latest revision.

C. Excavate and backfill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage

at all times. D. Borrow:

1. Obtain material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced within the grading limits of the work from borrow areas selected and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the Owner’s Representative.

2. Grade borrow areas upon completion to provide complete surface drainage and to blend with surrounding contours.

3. Contractor is required to excavate sufficient material to construct contours and features as per plans. Payment of all excavation will be paid as a lump sum.

E. Surplus material: 1. Owner’s Representative will direct contractor in the placement of surplus

excavated material. 2. Surplus material will be used on the project or stored on site at a location

approved be the Owner’s Representative. F. Swales, ditches and gutters:

1. Cut accurately to the cross sections, grades and elevations shown on the grading plans.

2. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, sticks, trash and other debris until completion of the work.

3. Swales and ditches shall be smooth in nature to accommodate standard mowing practices and equipment.



G. Unauthorized excavation:

1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from the Owner’s Representative.

2. Under footings, foundations or retaining walls: a. Fill unauthorized excavations by extending the indicated bottom

elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom without altering the required top elevation.

b. When acceptable to the Owner’s Representative, lean concrete fill may be used to bring the bottom elevation to proper position.

3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative.

H. Stability of excavations:

1. Slope sides of excavations to 1:1 or flatter, unless otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative.

2. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of the materials being excavated.

3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling.

I. Excavating for structures:

1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of 0.10 ft and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removing concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction required and for inspection.

2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation: a. Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before concrete is placed. b. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to

receive concrete. 3. Excavate for footings and foundations only after general site excavating,

filling and grading are complete.

J. Cold weather protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature

is less than 35 degrees F.

K. Excavating for detention ponds: 1. The exposed sub-grade of pond areas shall be scarified to a minimum depth

of 8 inches. Before compaction, the scarified soils shall be adjusted to within a moisture content range of plus or minus 2 percent of optimum moisture content.



3.03 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. General: 1. For each classification listed below, place acceptable soil material in layers

to required sub-grade elevations. 2. In excavations:

a. Use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Building pads and/or under building slabs:

a. Provide Select low PI material to build up building pad and slab to elevations called out on the drawings. If the material on site is not suitable, the select material will need to be imported from off site.

b. Use granular fill, if so called for on the drawings or soils report, complying with aggregate acceptable under Section 03300 of these Specifications.

B. Ground surface preparation:

1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions and deleterious matter from ground surface prior to placement of fills.

2. Plow, strip or break up sloped surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface.

3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under “compacting” for the particular area, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to the optimum moisture content and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.

C. Placing and compacting:

1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8” in loose depth. 2. Before compacting, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide

the optimum moisture content. 3. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for area.

Compact per paragraph 3.05 A., B. and C. this Section. 4. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or

containing frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structure’s required

elevations. 6. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by

carrying the material uniformly around the structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift.



3.04 GRADING

A. General:

1. Uniformly grade the areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas.

2. Smooth the finished surface within specified tolerance. 3. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations

are shown on the drawings or between such points and existing grades. 4. Where a change of slope is indicated on the drawings, construct a rolled

transition section having a minimum radius of approximately 8’-0” unless adjacent construction will not permit such a transition or if such a transition defeats positive control of drainage.

B. Grading outside building lines:

1. Grade adjacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures and to prevent ponding.

2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular surface changes, and: a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under walks to line, grade

and cross-section with finished surface not more than 0.10 ft above or below the required sub-grade elevation.

b. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.05 ft above or below the required sub-grade elevation.

3.05 COMPACTING

A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to ASTM D1557. 85% proctor density in lawn area and 95% proctor density in building area.

B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the actual density of each layer of soil material in place and/or as specified by the Soil Engineer’s report. 1. Structures:

a. Compact the top 8” of sub-grade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 98% of maximum density unless otherwise called out in the plans or soils report.

2. Lawn and unpaved areas: a. Compact the top 8” of sub-grade and each layer of fill material or

backfill material at 85% of maximum density. Lawn areas not to exceed 90% of maximum density.

b. Compact the upper 12” of filled areas, or natural soils exposed by excavating, at 85% of maximum density. Lawn areas not to exceed 90% of maximum density.



3. Walks

a. Compact the top 8” of sub-grade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density unless otherwise called out in the plans or soils report.

4. Pavements: a. Compact the top 8” of sub-grade and each layer of fill material or

backfill material at 95% of maximum density unless otherwise called out in the plans or soils report.

C. Moisture control:

1. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by disking, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture-density relation tests approved by the Owner’s Representative.

3.06 TREATED SUBGRADE

A. All parking lot pavement sub-grade shall be treated in accordance the plans and

Engineers Soils Report.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Secure Owner’s Representative’s inspection and approval of sub-grades and fill layers before subsequent construction is permitted thereon.

B. Provide at least the following tests to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. 1. At paved areas, a minimum of one field density test for every 7,500 square

feet, but a minimum of three tests for all areas or as requested by the Owner’s Representative. Testing to be paid for by the City.

2. At lawn and unpaved areas, at least one field density test for every 20,000 square feet, but a minimum of three test for all areas or as requested by the Owner’s Representative. Testing to be paid for by the City.

3. Sub-grade shall be checked for stability even though it may meet the compaction requirements. The check for stability shall be proof rolling with a large roller or loaded dump truck and visual observation to insure that there is no pumping of the sub-grade.

C. If, in the Owner’s Representative’s opinion based on reports of the testing

laboratory, sub-grade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions of Section 01410 of these Specifications. Re-testing of areas that failed and have to be re-tested to be paid for by the contractor.



3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of newly graded areas:

1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free from trash and weeds.

2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to the specified tolerances.

B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction

operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape and compact to the required density prior to further construction.

3.09 CERTIFICATION

A. Upon completion of this portion of the work and as a condition of its acceptance,

deliver to the Owner’s Representative a written report certifying that the compaction requirements have been obtained. State in the report the area or fill or embankment, the compaction density obtained and the type or classification of fill material placed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02265 FINISH GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL


1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Finish grade subsoil.

B. Place, level, and compact topsoil.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 02211 - Rough grading subsoil to site contours.

B. Section 02515 - Concrete Paving.

1.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work. B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving and curbs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Imported, see Section 02220, Excavating, Backfilling and

Compaction; Section 02485, Seeding and 02934, Sodding.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this Section.

B. Beginning work of this Section means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 SUBSOIL PREPARATION

A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, and stones, in excess of ½ inch in size. Remove subsoil contaminated with petroleum products.

3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil in areas where earth or no other building or paving is scheduled on the drawings.

B. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.

C. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough or low areas. Maintain levels, profiles, and contours of subgrade.

D. Remove stone, roots, grass, weeds, debris, and foreign material while spreading. E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants, building, and concrete curbs to prevent

damage.

F. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site.

G. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

3.04 TOLERANCES

SECTION 02265 FINISH GRADING


A. Top of Topsoil: Plus or minus 1/10 ft.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02400 SITE DRAINAGE


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide site drainage as shown and specified. The work includes: 1. Drainage structures and piping. 2. Excavating and backfilling site drainage work.

B. Related work:

Section 01510: Site Access. Section 02200: Earthwork


A. Comply with Section 02000 Site Work requirements.

B. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following:

1. Oklahoma Department of Transportation Standards and Specifications. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM). 3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO). 4. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA).

C. Excavating, backfilling and compacting operations: Comply with Section 02220

requirements and as specified.

D. Obtain acceptance of Owner's Representative of installed and tested site drainage system prior to installing backfill materials.

E. Identify all existing underground utilities and their location.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Provisions of Section 01340.

B. Provide site drainage record drawings:

1. Legibly mark drawings to record actual construction. 2. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface

improvements. 3. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by

Change Order.

C. Provide manufacturer's product data for each type of pipe material.




A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the drawings.

B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns and other features designated to remain as part of the landscape work.

C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheeting, underpinning or other methods

as required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from entering excavations. Barricade open excavations and post warning lights at work adjacent to public streets and walks in accordance with OSHA requirements.

D. Underpin adjacent structure(s) including utility service lines which may be

damaged by excavation operations.

E. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by site drainage earthwork operations. Cost of repair at Contractor's expense.

F. Promptly notify the Owner's Representative of unexpected subsurface conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Site drainage piping: Provide types and sizes indicated. Provide matching

couplings, fittings and accessory components to ensure continuity of the site drainage system. 1. Reinforced concrete pipe fittings: ASTM C76, Class IV pipe or of equal

strength sufficient to attain D-load, 0.01" of 2,000 lbs. with ASTM C443 "O" ring seals or compression type rubber gasket joints. Sizes to 10" diameter may be non-reinforced with equivalent strength.

2. Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing: ASTM F405 and F667. A product which meets this specification is ADS N-12 perforated corrugated polyethylene tubing by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc., Columbus, Ohio or conform to AASHTO M252.

B. Trench drains, manholes, catch basins, inlets: Provide type and sizes indicated.

1. Frames, grates and covers: ASTM A48 grey cast iron, asphalt coated. 2. Concrete masonry units: ASTM C139. 3. Brick: ASTM C32, grade MS. 4. Precast concrete manhole barrels and cones: ASTM C478, 5" wall thickness

with ASTM C443 "O" ring gasket joints.



5. Mortar: a. Mortar for jointing concrete pipe and for laying and parging

concrete masonry: 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts sand.

b. Mortar for brickwork: 1 part Portland Cement, 1/2 part hydrated lime and 4-1/2 parts sand.

C. Fine granular fill: Clean natural sand.

D. Course granular fill: ¾” crushed limestone.

E. Concrete: 3,000 psi air entrained concrete complying with requirements of

Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

F. Earth fill: Natural sandy-clay subsoil, soil-rock mixtures, or approved excavated materials, free of foreign matter, organic material and debris. 1. Excavated materials removed in site drainage trenching operation may be

used as backfill when acceptable to the Owner's Representative.

G. Soil separator: Rot resistant polypropylene filter fabric, permeable and unaffected by freezing and thawing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Lay out site drainage work and establish extent of excavation by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum elevation and project engineering reference points. Set required lines, levels and elevations.

B. Do not cover or enclose work of this Section before obtaining required

inspections, tests, approvals and location recording.

C. Remove existing paving, including base material, as required to accommodate site drainage work. Saw cut existing paving to provide uniform straight transition at intersection of new to existing paving.

3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Conform to Section 02000 Site Work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform excavating and backfilling as required to install site drainage work.



B. Provide trench wall support and pumping of surface and ground water as required to provide suitable conditions.

C. Excavate trenches to accommodate indicated bedding conditions and material.

Trim and shape trench bottoms to proper line and grade, free of irregularities. Remove unstable material and replace with compacted fill.

D. Install site drainage system true to grade and alignment indicated.

1. Provide necessary equipment for lowering pipe safely into trenches. Handle pipe and accessories to prevent damage. Damaged materials replaced at Contractor's expense.

2. Do not place pipe in water, nor when trench or weather is unsuitable for site drainage.

3. Remove all dirt and foreign material from pipe before installation. Provide bulkheads as required to prevent entrance of dirt or water after installation.

4. Lay and fit pipe sections to provide a smooth, uniform invert, with sealed joints and full bearing in bedding material. Provide continuous fall in flow direction.

5. Excavate bell holes under each bell to ensure uniform bedding for all types of bell and spigot piping.

6. Install pipe joint gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install concrete pipe in accordance with ACPA "Concrete Pipe Field Manual".

7. Cut pipe ends entering structures flush with inner face of structures. 8. Provide soil separator over granular backfill at perforated site drainage

piping. 9. Extend site drainage system to outfall indicated and make required

connection. 10. Obtain required inspections and perform testing prior to backfilling.

Remove obstructions, replace damaged components and retest as required. Provide a satisfactory free flowing drainage system.

11. Sub-drain pipe installation: Conform to AASHTO M252-851.

E. Backfill trenches with an approved backfill material, free from large clods, stones and debris. 1. Backfill trenches in 8" compacted layers until there is a cover of not less

than 24" over piping. Place remaining backfill material in 12" compacted layers.

2. Backfill evenly on both sides of piping for full depth. Provide thorough compaction of fill under pipe haunches.

3. Provide granular backfill at all paved areas. 4. Provide concrete encasement where indicated.



F. Mechanically compact backfill. Water settling, puddling and jetting as a compaction method are not acceptable.

G. Fill, compact and restore to original level and condition all settlement.

H. Replace paving, lawns and finished surfaces removed to accommodate the site drainage system, except where new surfaces are provided as part of the work.

I. Construct trench drains, catch basins, manholes, inlets and other drainage structures as indicated. 1. Install drainage structures on a sound cast-in-place or pre-cast segmented

concrete base. 2. Lay radial and batter concrete masonry with full mortar joints completely

filled with Portland cement mortar. Strike joints flush with surface of concrete masonry.

3. Horizontal joints shall not exceed 1/2". Vertical joints shall not exceed 1/4" on their interior surface.

4. Provide headers where required to adjust frames to grade, breaking joints between courses.

5. Parge inside and outside face of masonry structure walls with 1/4" mortar. 6. Construct flow channels with concrete or brick conforming to the inside

diameter of connecting lines. Make changes in grade gradually and make changes in line with true curves.

7. Set frames and covers to required grade and bed in place with mortar. 8. Cold weather protection: Provide all necessary means for heating concrete,

masonry materials and mortar to protect concrete and masonry work during and after installation from damaged by frost and freezing.

9. Perform no work when the temperature is below 25 degrees F. (ambient).

3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Transport excess excavated materials, including rock, to designated disposal area on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread as directed. Remove from site and legally dispose of trash and debris.

3.05 CLEANING A. Maintain site drainage piping and structures in workable condition during

construction operations.

B. Flush site drainage system with water in sufficient volume to obtain free flow through each line. Remove all silt, trash and debris just prior to acceptance of work.

C. Upon completion of site drainage work, remove tools and equipment. Provide site clear, clean, free of debris and suitable for site work operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02934 SODDING

Section 02934 - 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: A. Provide and install sodded lawns as indicated on drawings and specified

herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. General Requirements

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) guideline

specifications to sodding.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver sod on pallets and protect from sun, wind and dehydration prior to

installation.

B. Do not cut or deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit name, address and phone number of sod supplier.

B. Manufacturer's label with analysis data on lawn fertilizer.

1.06 MAINTENANCE: A. Maintain sod after installation to achieve a well rooted and vigorous growing

lawn or until final acceptance, whichever is longer, and shall include a minimum of two (2) mowings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL:

A. Sod shall be of type as indicated on drawings and shall be well rooted, healthy,

free of weeds, disease, nematodes, and soil borne insects. Sod shall also be uniform in color, leaf texture, and density.

B. Fertilizer shall be granular or pellet 13-13-13 or as determined by soil testing.

C. Water shall be free of substances harmful to sod growth.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality and depth. Do not start sodding

work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing site conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Loosen topsoil of lawn areas to be planted. Remove existing vegetation, sticks,

roots, rubbish, foreign matter and stones over one inch (1") in any dimension from the top two inches (2") of the sod bed. Areas where the finish grade was sat for extended periods of time will need to be tilled or disked to remove vegetation and to loosen compacted soil to 85% maximum density.

B. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with a loose, uniformly fine

texture. Float smooth to remove ridges and fill depressions as required to drain.

C. Finish grade shall be smooth and approximately one inch (1") below curbs, walks and other paved surfaces.

D. Apply 13-13-13 fertilizer on finish grade prior to sod installation at a rate of

eight (8) pounds of product per 1000 square feet.

E. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled, or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to sodding.

3.03 SOD INSTALLATION:

A. Work within seasonal limitations of the sod type specified. Install sod between

April 15 and August 30. Deviation from these dates shall be submitted by the contractor for approval by the owner or the owner’s representative before installation.

B. Large roll sod will be allowed only if biodegradable netting is used or nylon

netting is removed during the installation of the sod.

C. Lay sod to form a solid mass tightly-fitted joints. Do not overlay edges. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses.

D. Sod shall be placed so that top of sod does not create drainage issues or ponding

conditions, trapping water at edges of curbs, walks and other paved surfaces.

E. Do not install sod on saturated or frozen soil.



F. Water sod lightly then roll with a water filled commercial lawn roller to ensure

contact with subgrade and to insure a smooth surface free of lumps and depressions.

G. Immediately following rolling, water sod thoroughly and continue to water after

installation to achieve a well rooted and vigorous growing lawn or until final acceptance, whichever is longer. Contractor to provide watering equipment as required for areas not covered by an irrigation system.

H. Repeat sod rolling as needed after one week to achieve a smooth level surface.

I. On 4:1 slopes or greater sod shall be secured with sod staples as needed to

prevent sod from sloughing off slopes. Slopes shall not exceed 3:1.

J. Replace dead sod as required prior to final acceptance.

3.04 CLEANING:

A. During the work, the premises are to be kept neat and orderly at all times. Storage areas for materials shall be organized so that they are neat and orderly. All trash, including debris from removing weeds or rocks from sodded areas, shall be removed from the site daily as the work progresses. All walk and driveway areas shall be kept clean by sweeping or hosing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide formwork in accordance with provisions of this Section for cast-in-place concrete shown on the drawings or required by other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Related work:

Section 03210: Steel Reinforcement Section 03300: Cast-in-place Concrete


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and

experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Design of formwork is the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Standards: in addition to complying with pertinent regulations of governmental

agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent provisions of ACI 347.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: After the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for proprietary materials including form coatings, ties, and accessories, and manufactured form systems if used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM MATERIALS

A. Except for metal forms, use new materials. Materials may be reused during

progress of the work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, re- coated for each use, and capable of producing formwork of the required quality.

B. For footings and foundations, use boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes,

substantially constructed to shapes indicated and to support the required loads.



2.02 FORM TIES

A. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together with combination steel ties and spreaders approved by the Owner's Representative: 1. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows, each tier plumb from top to bottom

and each row level. 2. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6" below the pour lines.

Tighten after concrete has set and before the next pour is made. 3. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide form ties of removable type with the

bolts equipped with permanent plugs and a system approved by the Owner's Representative for fixing the plugs in place.

2.03 DESIGN OF FORMWORK

A. General: 1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support

vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure.

2. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose.

3. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.

4. Design forms and formwork to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on the formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of the structure during construction.

5. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.

6. Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent objectionable deflection.

7. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities, and within the allowable tolerances.

8. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints, and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and prevent fins.

9. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and construction loads.

2.04 EARTH FORMS

A. Side forms for footings may be omitted, and concrete may be placed directly

against excavation only when requested by the Contractor and approved by the Owner's Representative.

B. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional concrete 1" on each side of

the minimum design profiles and dimensions shown on the drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades and level and plumb work in the finished structure.

2. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, reglets, chambers, blocking, screens, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features as required.

B. Fabrication:

1. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

2. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.

3. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.

4. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where so directed by the Owner's Representative.

C. Forms for exposed concrete:

1. Drill forms to suit ties being used, and to prevent leakage of cement paste around tie holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.

2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersection planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back the joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections.

3. Use extra studs, walls and bracing to prevent objectionable bowing of forms between studs, and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips of form material which will produce bow.

D. Corner treatments:

1. Unless shown otherwise, form chambers with 3/4" x 3/4" strips, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edges.

2. Extend terminal edges to required limit, and miter the chamber strips at changes in direction.



E. Locate control joints as indicated on the drawings and as approved by the Owner's Representative.

F. Provisions for other trades:

1. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. 2. Verify size and location of openings, recesses, and chases with the trade

requiring such items. 3. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into the concrete.

3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. General:

1. Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit form removal with complete safety.

2. Do not remove shoring until the member has acquired sufficient strength to support its own weight, the load upon it, and the added load of construction.

3. Do not strip floor slabs in less than two days. 4. Do not strip vertical concrete in less than seven days.

B. Finished surfaces:

1. Exercise care in removing forms from finished concrete surfaces so that surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that corners are true, sharp, and unbroken.

2. Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull the form ties neatly. 3. Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or other metal to project from, or be

visible on, any concrete surface except where so shown on the drawings. 4. Solidly pack form tie holes, rod holes, and similar holes in the concrete. For

packing, use the cement grout specified in Section 03300, flushing the holes with water before packing, screeding off flush, and grinding to match adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03210 STEEL REINFORCEMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide concrete reinforcement where shown on the drawings specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related Work:

Section 03100: Concrete Formwork. Section 03210: Steel Reinforcement. Section 03300: Cast-in-place Concrete. Section 03345: Concrete Finishing.

l.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and

experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Comply with pertinent provisions of the following, except as may be modified

herein: 1. ACl 318. 2. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: After the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to proceed,

submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance

with the specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings showing details of bars, anchors, and other items, if any,

provided under this Section.


A. Delivery and Storage: 1. Use necessary precautions to maintain identification. 2. Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease,

and other bond-breaking coatings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Bars: 1. Provide deformed billet steel bars complying with ASTM A615. Using

grades shown on the Drawings.



B. Steel Wire: 1. Comply with ASTM A82. 2. For tie wire, comply with Fed Spec QQ-W-461, annealed steel, black, 16

gage minimum.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Provide welded steel, complying with ASTM A185, 6" x 6" x 10" x 10".

D. Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening

reinforcement in place: 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless

otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Do not use wood, brick, or other non-complying material. 3. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners

where base material will not support chair legs.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions,

with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual. 2. In case of fabricating errors, do not straighten or re-bend reinforcement in a

manner that will weaken or injure the material. 3. Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be acceptable:

a. Bar lengths, depths, and/or bends exceeding the specified fabrication tolerances.

b. Bends and/or kinks not shown on the Drawings. c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other

cause.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATlON

A. General:

1. Comply with the specified standards for detail and method of placing reinforcement and supports, except as may be modified herein.

2. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

3. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, and concrete placing operations.

4. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.



5. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverage’s for concrete protection. 6. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with the

specified tie wire. 7. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete

surfaces.

B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable, lapping adjoining pieces at least one full mesh.

C. Provide sufficient numbers of supports, and of strength to carry the reinforcement.

D. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond last leg of any continuous bar

support.

E. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

3.03 SPLICES

A. Lap Splices:

1. Tie securely with the specified wire to prevent displacement of splices during placement of concrete.

B. Splice Devices:

1. Obtain the Owner's Representative approval prior to using splice devices. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Splice in a manner developing at least 125% of the yielding strength of the

bar.

C. Welding: 1. Perform in accordance with AWS D1.4-79.

D. Do not splice bars except at locations shown on the drawings, or as otherwise

specifically approved by the Owner's Representative.

3.04 TESTING

A. Samples: 1. Materials to be sampled at the building site shall have been delivered thereto

at least 72 hours before it is needed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION O3300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRlPTlON

A. The extent of cast-in-place concrete is shown on drawings.

B. Related work specified elsewhere: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork. Section 03210: Steel Reinforcement. Section 03345: Concrete Finishing.

1.02 TESTING

A. Owner to employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory, to perform specified

testing. B. Tests required for aggregate:

1. Test for conformance to ASTM C-33. 2. Make one test for each 100 cubic yards of fine aggregate. 3. Make one test for each 250 cubic yards of coarse aggregate.

C. Tests required for concrete:

1. Make and store test specimens in conformance with ASTM C-31. 2. Compressive strength tests: ASTM C-39:

a. Make four (4) cylinders for each test. b. Break two cylinders at seven days and two at 28 days unless

otherwise directed by Owner's Representative. 3. Make one compressive strength test for each day's placement or each 50 cubic

yards of concrete of each specified strength. 4. If test strength of concrete does not comply with strength requirements of

these specifications and is sufficiently low that, in opinion of Owner's Representative, performance of structure is jeopardized, the Owner's Repre- sentative may require that drilled core test specimens be cut from structure at location at which the questionable concrete was placed. Cores shall be secured and tested in accordance with ASTM C-42. If results of these tests show that actual strength of concrete is sufficiently low as to jeopardize performance of structure, the Owner's Representative may require that concrete be removed from structure, and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

5. Perform slump test at point of placement immediately prior to placing concrete. Test in accordance with ASTM C-143.

6. Test for percentage of entrained air in accordance with ASTM C-231 at time of slump testing.



D. Inspection of batch plant: 1. Batch plant operation will be inspected as required to insure that concrete

delivered to the job complies with specifications. Testing laboratory engaged by Contractor will provide this service as directed by Owner's Representative.

2. Plant inspection reports shall include: a. Location of plant. b. Job location. c. Concrete design mix number and strength. d. Concrete design proportion, source, type and amount of cement,

aggregates and admixtures used, surface water added and total water used.

e. Slump. f. Air content. g. Temperature of heated concrete. h. Capacity and condition of mixing truck. i. Percent of capacity loaded. j. Condition of batching installation. k. Condition of heating installation. l. Period of inspection. m. Number and sizes of batches delivered.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The following codes and manuals form a part of this specification:

1. Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings (ACI 301-72; Rev 81).

2. Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete (ACI 211-77). 3. Concrete production facilities shall have a current "National Ready Mixed

Concrete Association Certificate of Conformance for Concrete Production Facilities".

4. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-77).

1.05 SUBMlTTALS

A. Submit proposed mix design to Owner's Representative for review. Include certification required in admixture specification.

B. Mockups: Before casting concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample

submittals and to demonstrate typical finish of surfaces, textures, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed work:

a. Build mockup in location where it can remain until the concrete is complete.



b. Build mockups that represent all the conditions in the cast-in-place concrete as shown on Drawings.

c. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place concrete, finishes, as applicable.

d. In presence of Landscape Architect, damage part of the exposed surface, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.

e. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of mockups before casting additional concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cement: Portland Cement, (ASTM C-150, Type I. Use high early strength Portland Cement (Serial designation C-150, Type III) where specified and elsewhere at Contractor's option and at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Fine aggregate: Sand particles shall be coarse, sharp, clean and conforming to ASTM C-33.

C. Coarse aggregate: 1. Crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C-33 for normal weight concrete. 2. Light weight conforming to ASTM C-330 for semi-light weight concrete.

Minimum Fsp (splitting ratio) of 6.0. D. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalines, organic

materials or other deleterious substances. E. Admixtures:

1. Water reducing admixture: ASTM C-494, Type A, containing no more chlorideions than are present in municipal drinking water. a. Acceptable products:

(1) Eucone WR-75; The Euclid Chemical Co. (2) Pozzolith ZOON: Master Builders. (3) Plastocrete 160; Sika Chemical Corp.

2. Water reducing, retarding admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, containing no more chlorideions than are present in municipal drinking water. a. Acceptable products:

(1) Eucone Retarder-75: Euclid Chemical Co. (2) Pozzolith 100XR: Master Builders. (3) Plastiment: Sika Chemical Co.

3. High range water reducing admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C-494, Type F or G, containing no more chlorideions than are present in municipal drinking water. a. Acceptable products:

(1) Eucon 37; The Euclid Chemical Co. (2) Sikament; Sika Chemical Corp.

4. Non-chloride accelerator: ASTM C-494, Type C or E, containing no more chlorideions than are present in municipal drinking water.



a. Acceptable products: (1) Accelguard 80; The Euclid Chemical Co. (2) Darex Set Accelerator; W. R. Grace.

5. Air entraining admixture: ASTM C-260. 6. No calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions

will be permitted. 7. Written certification of conformance to specified requirements and the

chloride ion content will be required from admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review.

F. Curing compound: ASTM C-309 for cast-in-place slabs, except those receiving

concrete staining products or cementious topping. No concrete treatment shall be used without Owner's Representative's approval. 1. Acceptable products:

a. West Concrete Floor Treatment. b. Guardian Clear Bond. c. TRI-KOTE Concrete Treatment. d. Horn Clear Seal. e. Master Builders Master Seal. f. Conspec No. 1" by Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.

G. Furnish concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94, Alternate No. 3, Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. Design concrete in accordance with ACI Standard Recommended Practice for the Design of Concrete Mixes (ACI 211-77) to produce strength of concrete with slumps and maximum sizes of coarse aggregate specified. Design concrete so the concrete materials will not segregate and excessive bleeding will not occur.

H. Reinforcing: As specified in Division 3.

I. Floor underlayment: Ardex K-15; Ardex, Inc., 630 Stoops Ferry Road, Corapolis,

Pa. 15108, (412) 264-4240.

Note: Curing agents or hardeners are not allowed for tennis courts, sport courts, playground or spraygrounds surfaces to receive color finish.

2.02 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS

A. Use a testing laboratory acceptable to Owner's Representative for preparing and

reporting proposed mix designs. Submit written reports to Owner's Representative of each proposed mix at least 28 days prior to start of work. Do not place concrete until mixes have been reviewed and approved by Owner's Representative. The specified minimum strengths are to be exceeded in accordance with Paragraph 4.3 of Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-83).



B. Minimum compressive strength 28 day: 3000 psi footings; 3500 psi, all other unless specifically called out on the plans.

C. Minimum cement content: 5 sacks per cu. yd. for footings; 6 sacks per cu. yd. for

other unless otherwise approved in submittals.

D. Slump: 4" plus or minus 1".

E. Maximum size aggregate: Generally 3/4".

2.03 WATER STOP

A. Acceptable manufacturers: Williams Products, Inc.

B. Flat, natural rubber, dumbbell type, 5" wide, 1/4" minimum center thickness, 3500 psi minimum tensile strength, 525% minimum elongation to break.

2.04 COLORING

A. All concrete designated as colored in plans and specifications shall contain the proper proportion of Chromix Admixture for color conditioned concrete specified and shall be used with Lithochrome Colorwax as manufactured by L. M. Scoffield Company, Los Angeles, California and comply with L.B.C. Standard No. 26-9.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACING

A. Notify Owner's Representative of intent to pour at least twenty-four (24) hours prior

to placing concrete.

B. Before placing concrete, clean equipment for mixing and transporting concrete. Remove debris and ice from spaces to be occupied by concrete. Forms to be removed shall be thoroughly wetted or oiled. Sprinkle sub-grade sufficiently to prevent suction, where waterproof membrane is not required. Remove excess water from place of deposit. Reinforcement, forms, membrane, fillers and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. Do not deposit concrete during rain unless it is adequately protected. In that case, be prepared to protect newly placed concrete from rain until it has hardened sufficiently so that it will not be damaged. Minimum of 2 hours between placing columns and floors.

C. Before placing concrete, verify installation of all reinforcements, sleeves, waterproof

membrane, forms for openings, fill materials, anchors and items related to mechanical, plumbing and electrical trades.



D. Convey from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent separation or loss of materials. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than 4 feet. Where longer drops are necessary, use a chute, tremie or other approved conveyance to assist concrete into place without separation. Chutes shall be metal and have maximum slope of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal; minimum of 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes greater than 20 feet long will not be permitted.

E. Place concrete at a rate to keep concrete plastic and flowing readily into spaces

between bars. Concrete temperature shall be 60-80°F. No concrete that is partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited, nor shall re-tempered concrete be used.

F. Thoroughly compact concrete by suitable means during placing and work around

reinforcement and into corners and recesses of forms. Use vibrators under competent supervision to aid in placement of concrete. Insert vibrators and withdraw vertically at 18" to 30'' spacing for 5 to 15 seconds duration.

3.02 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather.

3.03 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Conform to ACI 306 when concreting during cold weather.

3.04 FINISH FOR FORMED CONCRETE

A. After removal of forms, if any honeycomb places or rock pockets exist, notify

Owner's Representative and repair in accordance with his instructions. In general, remove all loose material, wet surface thoroughly, and fill all voids with a stiff mixture of one part cement to two parts sand. In exposed construction, mix white Portland Cement with standard to blend patch with surrounding surface.

B. On exposed concrete, smooth off joint marks and fins and leave surface smooth,

dense and free from honeycomb, prominent grain markings and bulges or depressions more than 3/16" in 4'.

C. Cork floated finish (on exposed concrete, except omit at round columns):

1. Remove forms at an early stage, within 2 to 3 days of placement where possible. Remove ties. Remove all burrs and fins.

2. Mix one part Portland Cement and one part fine sand with sufficient water to produce a stiff mortar. Dampen wall surface. Apply mortar with firm rubber float or with trowel, filling all surface voids. Compress mortar into voids using a slow-speed grinder or stone. If the mortar surface dries too rapidly to permit proper compaction and finishing, apply a small



amount of water with a fog-sprayer. Produce the final texture with a cork float.

3.05 FINISH FOR SLABS

A. After suitable bulkheads, screens and, if specified, jointing materials have been

positioned, concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints, beginning at a bulkhead edge form or corner. Place each batch into the edge of previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregations. If there is a delay in casting, thoroughly spade concrete placed after the delay and consolidate at edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Distribute concrete by shovels and consolidate by other suitable means. Bring concrete to correct level with a wood straightedge and strike off. Do not use wood bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface.

B. Roughen slabs to receive toppings with stiff brushes or rakes before the final set.

C. After concrete has been properly placed, struck off and darbied or bullfloated, it shall

not be worked until ready for floating. The off time between darbying and power floating may vary from 2 to 8 hours or more depending on the weather conditions, concrete temperature and concrete mixture. Begin power floating when water sheen has disappeared and mix has stiffened sufficiently that weight of a man standing on it leaves only a slight imprint on surface. If two power floating operations are necessary to bring surface to desired state, allow concrete to stiffen or become harder before beginning second floating operation.

D. Float finish: After power floating is complete, use wood float by hand to tighten the

surface and achieve a medium coarse finish. Hand wood float in a circular motion. Float sufficiently to remove cement paste from surface.

E. Trowel finish: Both power and hand troweling shall be required. Begin power

troweling as soon as little or no cement paste clings to blades. Continue troweling until surface is dense, smooth and free of all minor blemishes, such as trowel marks. 1. Final hand troweling shall be required to remove slight imperfections left by

troweling machines and to bring surface to a dense, smooth polished finish. Final hand troweling shall be continued until a ringing sound is heard as trowel passes over surface.

F. Give platforms and steps a light broom finish following sufficient troweling to seal

the surface and remove all minor blemishes such as trowel marks.

G. Pitch all slabs to drain as indicated on drawings; finish exposed slab edges; stair nosings with 1/2" round radius.

H. Finishes shall be true to planes within 1/4" in 10 feet as determined by a 10 foot

straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. If variations greater than



this exist, the Owner's Representative may direct contractor to grind floor to bring surface within the requirements. Grind as soon as possible, preferably within three (1) days, but not without Owner's Representative's direction and not until concrete is sufficiently strong to prevent dislodging coarse aggregate particles. Grinding will be considered only where slabs will be covered by finish materials. Patching of low spots will not be permitted. 1. Sprinkling of dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand on the surface of

fresh concrete to absorb water or to stiffen the mix will not be permitted during any stage of floor construction. If bleeding is excessive, remove by dragging hose just ahead of floating operation.

3.06 CURING

A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold

temperatures. Maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete.

B. Initial curing shall immediately follow finishing operation. Keep concrete

continuously moist at least overnight. 1. On slabs, use one of the following:

a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling. b. Absorptive mat or fabric kept continuously wet. c. Sand or other covering kept continuously wet. d. Curing compound specified. Apply compound at the rate and in

accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. Do not use curing compound on any surface against which additional concrete or other cementitious finishing materials are to be bonded.

C. Immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried, additional curing

shall be accomplished by one of the following materials or methods: 1. Continuing the method used in initial curing. 2. Waterproof paper conforming to "Specifications for Waterproof Paper for

Curing Concrete" (ASTM C-171). 3. Other moisture-retaining coverings approved.

D. Continue final curing until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not

necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of air in contact with concrete is above 50°F has totaled seven (7) days. Prevent rapid drying at end of curing period.

E. Excessive temperature changes: Changes in temperature of concrete shall be as

uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5°F in any one (1) hour or 50°F in any twenty-four (24) hour period.

F. Steel forms heated by sun and all wood forms in contact with concrete during final

curing period shall be kept wet. If forms are to be removed during curing period,



immediately employ one of above curing materials or methods. Continue such curing for remainder of curing period.

G. On completion of construction, clean all exposed slabs and apply a coat of curing

compound at rate of 600 sq. ft. per gallon.

3.07 LEVELING EXISTING SLABS A. Mix floor underlayment with water and apply to existing slab in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Level floor to a tolerance of 1/8" in ten feet in any direction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE -

STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 1 of 19

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - STRUCTURAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Slabs-on-grade. 2. Other concretes.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly ash; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

2. Submit supporting test data for compliance with 28 day compressive strength and air content for the mix design submitted. Comparison mix design performance data will not be accepted.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 2 of 19

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

F. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Waterproofing. 10. Semirigid joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips. 12. Repair materials.

I. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

J. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 3 of 19

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials."

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

F. Contractor Preconstruction Items:

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 4 of 19

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 5 of 19

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

C. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II (dual certified) Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: Refer general notes section 8 part D. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 6 of 19

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type S.

a. Vapor reducing admixture must be submitted for approval. b. Vapor reducing admixture must contain a manufacturer’s warranty and all

requirements of warranty must be adhered to during construction. c. Available products that can be incorporated into the Work include, but are

not limited to, the following: 1) Barrier One, Inc.; Barrier One 2) ISE Logik Industires Inc.; MVRA 900

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP. b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX. c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. d. Greenstreak; Swellstop. e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 7 of 19

2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement . 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,

conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse

sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 8 of 19

1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Refer General notes section 8, Part D.

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." Provide standees between upper and lower mats.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 9 of 19

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 10 of 19

be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor barrier before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.

F. 1. Review locations of splices with Architect.

G. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 11 of 19

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement, Refer slab on grade schedule (17/S103).

2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with

shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Refer slab on grade schedule (17/S103).

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 12 of 19

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

2. Do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-

textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 13 of 19

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 14 of 19

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances: 1/8” in 10 ft. in any direction with a straight edge.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 15 of 19

C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformedsurfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the followingmethods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven dayswith the following materials:

a. Water.b. Continuous water-fog spray.c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacentabsorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sidesand ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape oradhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes ortears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces toreceive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces toreceive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured andprepared slabs to match accepted mockup.

1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth and todepth required to reveal aggregate to match approved mockup.

2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishingsequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowingrecommended drying time between successive coats.

3. Continue polishing with progressively finer grit diamond polishing pads to glosslevel to match approved mockup.

4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishingoperations.

5. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 16 of 19

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill jointsuntil construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leavecontact faces of joint clean and dry.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect'sapproval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cementto two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using onlyenough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on thesurface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voidsmore than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depthto 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent.Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cementand standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will matchsurrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixtureand color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place andstrike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability andstructural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, forfinish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and highareas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a slopedtemplate.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch(0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely throughunreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 17 of 19

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams

and slabs.


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 18 of 19

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. Hold one set of two specimens for additional testing at 56 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

c. Test a set of two field-cured specimens at 56 days if specifically directed by the Architect/Engineer.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).


STRUCTURAL

Section 033000 - 19 of 19

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, andContractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shallcontain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, nameof concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work,design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions andmaterials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructivedevice may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis forapproval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests ofconcrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressivestrengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy ofconcrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by othermethods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed todetermine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do notcomply with the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03345 CONCRETE FINISHING


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: provide finishes on cast-in-place concrete as called for on the drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:

Section 03300: Cast-in-place Concrete



1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: After the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed,

submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this section. 2. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by

the Owner's Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until conditions are correct.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be

performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until conditions are correct.

SECTION 03345 CONCRETE FINISHING


3.02 FINISHING SLABS

A. Definition of Finishing Tolerances: 1. Class “B”: True plane within ¼" in ten feet as determined by a ten foot

straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 2. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative, provide the texturing

in one direction only. 3. Provide “medium” texturing as directed by the Owner's Representative or

otherwise called for on the drawings.

3.03 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot and cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Temperature, Wind, and Humidity:

1. Cold Weather: a. When the mean daily temperature outdoors is less than 40 degrees F,

maintain the temperature of the concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for the required curing period.

b. When necessary, provide proper and adequate heating system capable of maintaining the required heat without injury due to concentration of heat.

c. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.

2. Hot Weather: When necessary, provide wind breaks, fog spraying, shading,

sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material, applying as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow.

3. Rate of temperature change: Keep the temperature of the air immediately

adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period as uniform as possible and not exceeding a change of 5 degrees F in any one hour period, or 50 degrees F in any 24 hour period.

C. Protection From Mechanical Injury:

1. During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances such as heavy shock, load stresses, and excessive vibration.

2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage from construction equipment, materials, and methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain and running water.

3. Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way as to over stress the concrete.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04200-1 OF 5

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide and install all concrete masonry, complete with all necessary accessories, asindicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03200B. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300C. Standard Steel Doors and Frames - Section 08110D. Divisions 15 and 16

1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. ASTM C90 "Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units"B. ASTM C109 "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement

Mortars"C. ASTM C270 "Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry"D. ASTM C476 "Specification for Grout for Masonry"E. PCA "Concrete Masonry Handbook"F. ACI, "ACI Manual of Concrete Practice"G. IMIAC "Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather

Masonry Construction"H. NCMA "Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry"I. TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"

1.04 TESTING

A. Testing of Masonry Mortar and Grout as specified in this section shall be arranged bythe Contractor.

B. Masonry Mortar and Grout shall be sampled, handled and tested in strict accordancewith the Referenced Standard ASTM C109.

C. The following information shall be recorded concerning each sampling by theTesting Technician:1. Name of Technician taking sample.2. Date and time of sampling.3. Air temperature and weather condition at time of sampling.4. Design compressive strength of Mortar or Grout being sampled.5. Specific location in structure in which the Mortar or Grout is placed after

sampling.D. Tests shall be performed for each Mortar and Grout Sampling to determine the

following:1. Mortar or Grout temperature at time of sampling.



2. Mortar or Grout Slump.3. Compressive Strength of Test Cylinders in the following quantities at the

following increments from the date of sampling:a. One test at 7 daysb. One test at 28 daysc. One specimen shall be retained in reserve for 90 days from the date of

sampling for subsequent testing if required by the Architect.E. The Testing Laboratory shall prepare a report recording the information required in

items C. and D. above and mail the report directly to the Owner, Architect andContractor the day of the compressive tests.

F. Four cubes shall be made for each test. Perform a minimum of one test per day foreach day that mortar and/or Grout is placed.

G. Mortar and Grout to be tested shall be randomly selected by the Testing Technicianwithout direction from the Contractor or material supplier.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. CMU: Concrete Masonry Units shall conform to Referenced Standard ASTM C90,Grade N, Normal-weight Aggregate, Type I, Modular Units with Dry-Block integralwater-repellent as manufactured by Grace in sizes and shapes indicated on theDrawings with surface finish as follows:1. Exterior Split Face masonry Unites with integral color.2. Exterior smooth masonry units with tight surface texture and medium smooth

surface graining.3. Masonry Unit Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from the

manufacturer's complete standard color line.

2.02 MORTAR

A. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S, with minimum compressive strengthof 1,800 psi at 28 days.

2.03 GROUT

A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476, with minimum compressive strength of 2,000psi at 28 days.

2.04 REINFORCEMENT

A. Wire Reinforcement: Standard weight Dur-O-Wal Truss, galvanized, withprefabricated corners and tees as manufactured by Dur-O-Wal, or equal. Truss widthshall be 2" less than wall thickness.

B. Bar Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.



C. Horizontal Bar Reinforcement Positioner: AA 234, hot dipped galvanized, asmanufactured by AA Wire Products Company, or approved equal

2.05 MASONRY FLASHING

A. Perm-A-Barrier and Perm-A-Barrier Primer, as manufactured by Grace ConstructionProducts, or equal.

2.06 PREMOLDED CONTROL JOINT

A. AA 1100 Titewall, as manufactured by AA Wire Products Company, or approvedequal.

2.07 VENEER ANCHORS

A. AA401CE screw-on anchor with AA400 Flex-O-Lok tie, hot dipped galvanized, asmanufactured by AA Wire Products Company, or approved equal. Provide tie depthrequired to extend a minimum of 2½" into masonry.

2.08 LATEX MORTAR ADDITIVE

A. Acrylbond, as manufactured by TEC Incorporated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacture, prepare, install, protect and clean all Unit Masonry Products specified

herein in strict accordance with applicable requirements of Referenced Standards andManufacturer's Written Specifications.

B. Install all Masonry accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's writtenspecification.

C. Prior to initiating masonry construction, verify that existing work on which masonryis to be constructed is properly installed to lines and levels indicated on the drawingsand items to be provided by other trades are properly placed.

3.02 SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install all concrete masonry in running bond pattern with uniform width vertical andhorizontal concave joints. Course one unit and one joint vertically to equal 8".Course one full unit and one joint horizontally to equal 16". Install in true horizontaland plumb vertical alignment.

B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal andvertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings andfoundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and whereadjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. Forstarting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,including areas under cells.



C. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners.D. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where

adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.E. Perform job site cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take

care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges.F. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings. Unless indicated otherwise on

the Drawings, construct lintels using #5 bar reinforcement top and bottom of groutfilled cell supported at both sides of opening with grout filled cell with one #5vertically. Use reinforcing bars of one piece lengths only. Place and consolidategrout fill without disturbing reinforcing. Allow lintels to reach sufficient tensilestrength before removing temporary supports.

G. Provide temporary brace at sill and install metal door frames true and plumb withmasonry construction. Bed anchors of metal door frames into masonry joints asrecommended by frame manufacturer. Reinforce, with one #5 verticalReinforcement Bar, masonry cell adjacent to metal door frame and grout solid asspecified herein. Block joint between frame and masonry, maintaining appropriateclearance for subsequent sealant joint assembly, and fill door frame jambs solid withgrout.

H. Cut and closely fit masonry as required for penetrations, anchors, plates and otheritems to be built into masonry.

I. Install Horizontal Reinforcement at 16" on center vertically, in the first and secondjoint below the top of walls and in the first and second joint above and belowopenings. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 24" beyond the edge of openings.Install prefabricated reinforcement corners and/or tees at each mortar joint ofmasonry corners and intersections. Terminate all Horizontal Reinforcement atmasonry control joints.

J. Reinforce Bond Beams and Pilasters as indicated on drawings and specified herein.Support Horizontal Bar Reinforcement with Horizontal Bar ReinforcementPositioner. Position vertical Bar Reinforcement within ½" of location indicated onthe drawing or centered in Masonry Unit cell if not specifically located. Do notextend Bar Reinforcement across Masonry Control Joint unless noted otherwise onthe Drawings.

K. Provide cleanout opening at bottom of each Masonry Unit Cell to be reinforced bycutting interior face of base cell. Clean all mortar droppings and debris from verticalcell and secure in proper location all vertical Bar Reinforcement. Reseal openingwith masonry unit face shell. Install shoring and/or bracing if required to secure facecell prior to Grout installation.

L. Install Grout in all Vertical and Horizontal cells containing Bar Reinforcement. Donot place Grout until entire portion of wall to be grouted has attained sufficientstrength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Placegrout in lifts not exceeding 4 feet vertically and rod or vibrate each grout lift duringplacement to ensure complete consolidation into cell. Allow not less than 30minutes nor more than 60 minutes between placement of consecutive grout lifts of agiven pour.



M. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained orotherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units. Provide new units tomatch adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminateevidence of replacement.

N. During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes, except weep holes, andcompletely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacentwork to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application ofcaulking or sealant compounds where required.

O. Clean exposed concrete masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work andafter final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings.

P. Coordinate mechanical duct penetrations to avoid vertical reinforcement indicated onthe drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05510 METAL HANDRAILS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide metal fabrications as shown. The work includes: 1. Handrails and railings.


A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 2. American Welding Society (AWS). 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM).

B. Structural steel: Design, details, fabrication and erection shall comply with American

Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) standards. 1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings. 2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

C. Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code

D1.1. Quality welding procedures, welders and welding operations in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle metal fabrication items to prevent damage and deterioration.

B. Stack assembled items off the ground.


A. Coordinate metal fabrications work with trades furnishing items which will attach to

members for proper positioning.

B. Provide sleeves, anchors, inserts, clips and other items furnished under this Section and built in with work of other trades.

C. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for the work have been reviewed and

accepted.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 MATERIALS



A. Metal surfaces: Provide materials exposed to view smooth and free of pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

B. Steel pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade A, Schedule 40 standard finish.

C. Fasteners: Provide hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.

D. Paint: Reference Section 09900.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate work in accordance with reviewed and accepted shop drawings and

referenced standards.

B. Weld shop connections, except as otherwise indicated. Grind exposed welds smooth.

C. Provide joints and intersections tight fitting and securely fastened.

D. Provide metal fabrications work square, plumb, straight and within allowable tolerances.

E. Drill or punch holes required for attachment of other work and bolted connections.

Burned holes not acceptable.

F. Bend or form pipe and other members to continuous and true curves with joints neatly fastened and assembled.

G. Provide for anchorage of type required, coordinated with supporting structural.

Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

H. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field fittings and assembly.

I. Shop painting: Refer to Section 09900.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect substrates, field measure and verify installation conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide sleeves and anchorages which are built into concrete or masonry construction.

Furnish templates, setting drawings and instructions for installation of sleeves and anchorages.



B. Set hardware that is shop installed.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install metal fabrications in accordance with final shop drawings.

B. Perform fitting required for installation. Set the work accurately in location, alignment and elevation free of rack measured from established lines and levels. Assembled metal fabrications shall be firm, rigid, free of rattle and provide maximum protection against tampering and vandalism.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to provide flush, tight hairline joints.

D. Adjust handrails and railings before securing in place to ensure proper matching at

butting joints and proper alignment throughout their length. Space posts as indicated. Plumb posts in each direction.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work.

Remove from site all excess materials, debris and equipment. Repair damage resulting from metal fabrications work.

B. Upon completion of installation, clean factory finished metal fabrication items in

accordance with manufacturer's cleaning instructions. Exercise care to avoid damage to the finish coating.

3.05 METAL FABRICATIONS SCHEDULE

A. Handrails and railings: Steel pipe, welded construction, designs indicated.

1. Comply with NAAMM Pipe Railing Manual for structural design, materials, fabrication and installation.

2. Provide galvanized pipe sleeves for upright railing posts set in concrete or masonry. Anchor with grout.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATION

Section 55001 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide metal fabrications as shown.


A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards: 1. City of Oklahoma City Standards and Specifications. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction, (AISC). 3. American Welding Society, (AWS). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). 5. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM)

B. Structural steel: Design, details, fabrication, and erection shall comply with American

Institute of Steel Construction (AlSC) standards: 1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings. 2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

C. Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code

D1.1. Qualify welding procedures, welders, and welding operations in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure.


A. Deliver, store, and handle metal fabrication items to prevent damage and deterioration.

B. Stack assembled items off the ground.


A. Coordinate metal fabrications work with trades furnishing items which will attach to

members for proper positioning.

B. Provide sleeves, anchors, inserts, clips and other items furnished under this section and built-in with work of other trades.

C. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for the work have been reviewed and

accepted.


Section 55002 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Metal surfaces: Provide materials exposed to view smooth and free of pitting, seammarks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

B. Steel pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade A, Schedule 40, standard finish.

C. Fasteners: Provided hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or wherebuilt into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.

D. Paint :1. Metal primer paint: Standard rust inhibitive primer to be approved by Owner's

Representative.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate work in accordance with reviewed and accepted shop drawings andreferenced standards.

B. Weld shop connections, except as otherwise indicated. Grind exposed welds smooth.

C. Provide joints and intersections tight fitting and securely fastened.

D. Provide metal fabrications work square, plumb, straight, and within allowabletolerances.

E. Drill or punch holes required for attachment of other work and bolted connections.Burned holes not acceptable.

F. Bend or form pipe and other members to continuous and true curves, with joints neatlyfastened and assembled.

G. Provide for anchorage of type required, coordinated with supporting structure.Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

H. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field fitting andassembly.

I. Shop painting:1. Thoroughly clean ferrous metals. Remove all rust, dirt, and other substances that

would impair adherence of paint.2. Prime ferrous metals. Apply 2 shop coats to parts of items which will be

inaccessible after assembly. Provide minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness foreach coat.


Section 55003 of 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect substrate, field measure, and verify installation conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide sleeves and anchorages which are built into concrete or masonry construction. Furnish templates, setting drawings, and instructions for installation of sleeves and anchorages.

B. Set hardware that is shop installed.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install metal fabrications in accordance with final shop drawings.

B. Perform fitting required for installation. Set the work accurately in location, alignment,

and elevation free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Assembled metal fabrications shall be firm, rigid, free of rattle, and provide maximum protection against tampering and vandalism.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to provide flush, tight, hairline joints.

D. Adjust handrails and railings before securing in place to ensure proper matching at

butting joints and proper alignment throughout their length. Space posts as indicated. Plumb posts in each direction.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work.

Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from metal fabrications work.

B. Upon completion of installation, clean factory finished metal fabrication items in

accordance with manufacturer's cleaning instructions. Exercise care to avoid damage to the finish coating.

3.05 METAL FABRICATIONS SCHEDULE

A. Refer to plans.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

Section 051200 - 1 of 10

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements.

2. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.

3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel.

4. Division 09 painting Sections for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field

bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. Submit shop drawings and erection drawings for structural steel work. Contract

drawings shall not be copied for use as shop or erection drawings. Drawing size, once established, shall remain consistent throughout submittals. Manufacturing, fabricating or performing of any work prior to the Architect-Engineer's review and approval of shop drawings shall be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.


Section 051200 - 2 of 10

6. Shop drawings shall include information necessary for the fabrication and erection of the component parts of the structure. They shall indicate size and weight of members, cambers, holes and location of shop and field connections, the type, size and extent of welds, and the welding sequence when required. Welding symbols used on the shop drawings shall be as adopted by the American Welding Society. The proposed shop primer shall be indicated on the shop drawings. Detailing shall be in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual" and "Detailing for Steel Construction".

7. In general, the contract drawings are drawn to scale, but scale measurements shall not be used in locating or arranging members. The fabricator shall check the contract drawings and obtain field measurements of existing conditions before proceeding with detailing and report errors or inconsistencies discovered therein to the Architect-Engineer before starting shop drawings.

8. Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during the Architect-Engineer's review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the contract drawings and specifications. The review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions; coordinating his work with that of other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner.

9. Revisions shown on the shop drawings shall be considered as changes necessary to meet specified requirements as shown on Contract Documents and shall not be taken as the basis of claims for extra work.

10. Erection drawings shall describe necessary temporary supports and connections, including the sequence of installation and removal of temporary supports.

11. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, testing agency.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

G. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

H. Product Test Reports: For the following:


Section 051200 - 3 of 10

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.

I. Source quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD or a fabricator that has 5 years of experience for similar size and type projects.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has 5 years experience for similar size and type projects.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. 2005 Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges AISC 303-05.

2. 2005 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings AISC 341-05 and Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings Supplement No. 1 AISC 341s1-05.

3. 2005 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC 360-05. 4. 2004 RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490

Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.


Section 051200 - 4 of 10

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and

lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).

D. Rectangular and Square Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade C (FY=50 ksi).

E. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B (FY=46 ksi).

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: Refer plans for Standard, Extra strong, Double-extra strong. 2. Finish: Refer architectural.

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.


Section 051200 - 5 of 10

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain.

D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting

shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.


Section 051200 - 6 of 10

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:


Section 051200 - 7 of 10

1. SPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.2 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.


Section 051200 - 8 of 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.


Section 051200 - 9 of 10

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.


Section 051200 - 10 of 10

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07900 SEALANTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Standard Requirements for Contract Work, Special Provisions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Work under this Section consists of furnishing everything necessary for and incidental to the

execution and completion of all sealant work, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The extent of sealant work is indicated on the Drawings.

B. The required applications of sealants includes, but are not necessarily limited to the following

general locations: 1. New Sidewalk Expansion Joints.


A. Obtain sealant materials only from manufacturers who will, if required, send a qualified

technical representative to the project site, for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the materials.

B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in the application

of the types of materials required.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01340.

B. Samples, Sealants and Caulking: Submit three (3), 12" long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or caulking compound exposed to view. Install sample between 2 strips of material similar to or representative of typical surfaces where sealant or compound will be used, held apart to represent typical joint widths. Samples will be reviewed by Owner's Representative for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.



C. Guarantee, Sealants: Submit four (4) copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as air-tight and water-tight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data, as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. Provide guarantee signed by the Installer and Contractor.

1. Guarantee period of one (1) year from and after acceptance of the project by the Owner.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Pre-Installation Meeting: At the Contractor's direction, the Installer, Owner and/or the Owner's Representative, sealant manufacturer's technical representative, and other trades involved in coordination with sealant work shall meet with the Contractor at the project site to review the procedures and time schedule proposed for installation of sealants in coordination with other work. Review each major sealant application required on the project.

B. Condition of Other Work: The Installer must examine the joint surfaces, backing, and

anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet, and the conditions under which the sealant work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor and the Owner's Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealants. Do not proceed with the sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

C. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather

conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitation for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress at subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to avoid delay of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard colors plus thirty (30) additional Fastpak, as selected

by Owner's Representative.

B. Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate it's compatibility with the joint surfaces, joint fillers, sealers and other materials in the system. Provide only materials (manufacturer's recommended variation of the specified materials) which are know



to be fully compatible with the actual installation condition, as shown by manufacturer's published data or certification.

C. Provide size and shape of preformed sealant units as shown or, if not shown, as recommended

by the manufacturer, either in the published data or upon consultation with technical representative.

2.02 SELF-LEVELING JOINT SEALANT

A. Materials shall be Tremco THC-900 multi-component, chemically curing, self-leveling

polyurethane joint sealant as manufactured by Tremco, 10701 Shaker Blvd., Cleveland, Ohio 44104, or approved equal.

2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE SEALANT

A. Materials shall be Tremco Dymeric, epoxidized polyurethane terpolymer general purpose sealant

as manufactured by Tremco, 10701 Shaker Blvd., Cleveland, Ohio 44104, or approved equal.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Joint Cleaner: Provide the type of joint cleaning compound recommended by the sealant or caulking compound manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be cleaned.

B. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant

manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.

C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable.

D. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed

polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod which will control the joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed.

2.05 APPLICATIONS

A. Tremco THC-900 Sealant: Provide at all exterior horizontal slab or paving joints.

B. Tremco Dymeric Sealant: Provide at all other joints noted on the Drawings and around steel



handrail base plates where handrail has been raised.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealants. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealants. All joint surface preparation shall be in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent

requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise.

B. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for the application shown.

D. Install bond breaker tape wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that

elastomeric sealants will perform properly.

E. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

F. Install sealants to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant

manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead.

G. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or

to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces including rough textures such as exposed aggregate panels. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either the primer/sealer or the sealant/caulking compound.

H. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the work progresses. Clean the

adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to the adjoining surfaces of finishes.



3.03 CURE AND PROTECTION

A. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions andrecommendation, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surfacedurability.

B. The Installer shall advise the Contractor of procedures required for the curing and protectionof sealants and caulking compounds during the construction period, so that they will bewithout deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at the time ofOwner's acceptance.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 099123PAINTING

Section 099123 - 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of primers and paints.

C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels,

and operating parts of equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead

items.6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.7. Floors, unless specifically indicated.8. Ceramic and other tiles.9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.10. Glass.11. Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated.12. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.


A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, andApplications; 2016.

B. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters andDecorators Association; Current Edition.

C. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual;Current Edition.

D. SSPC V2 (PM2) - Systems and Specifications: Steel Structures Painting Manual,Volume 2; 2015.

E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).

F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.


Section 099123 - 2 of 6

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the followinginformation for each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product

category (e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include

description of each system.

B. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size,illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before

preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.3. Allow 10 for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for The Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product

run, store where directed.2. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the productsspecified, with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of workspecified with minimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number,brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colordesignation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and amaximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer'sinstructions.


Section 099123 - 3 of 6

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside thetemperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, includingtesting of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer;no exceptions.

B. Paints: Sherwin-Williams is the basis of design.1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle

C. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.

2.2 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Consult with the Architect to select MPI Paint System for any surface required to bepainted that does not have a specified Paint System. Do not proceed with painting untilobtaining written approval including specific MPI Paint System or approved substituteSystem recommended by the manufacturer. Paint system must be suitable for theindicated substrate and project environmental conditions.

B. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master

Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available atwww.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readilyand uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushingproperties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

3. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substratesindicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated bymanufacturer based on testing and field experience.

4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's workfrom a single production run.

5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless suchprocedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.


Section 099123 - 4 of 6

D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will beselected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.

E. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.

F. Pre-Primed Surfaces: Surfaces that have been factory-primed still require the totalspecified painting system, including primer. Factory-primed surfaces do not relieve thecontractor from applying the entire specified painting system.

2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Steel surfaces requiring paint:1. Two top coats and one coat primer. Requires full coat of primer even if surfaces

are factory primed.2. Products:

a. Top Coats: B53W01153 - Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial WaterbasedAlkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss,

b. Primer: B66W01310 - Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl®Universal Acrylic Primer,

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sandingmaterials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properlyprepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report anycondition that may potentially effect proper application.

D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect ofunsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.


Section 099123 - 5 of 6

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving thebest result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, lightfixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

E. Galvanized Surfaces:1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to

SSPC-SP 1.

F. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according toSSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

G. Steel to be Painted: Prime all surfaces, even if factory primed..

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions andrecommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry beforenext coat is applied.

C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.

D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particlesjust prior to applying next coat.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metalcontainers, and remove daily from site.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes until completion of project.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SSPC%20SP%201
























Section 099123 - 6 of 6

B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION







SECTION 10 4000

LARGE MATRIX DISPLAY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. LED Message Centers

B. Control Software

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Standard for Electric Signs, UL and CUL Listed

B. Standard for Control Centers for Changing Message Type Signs

C. Federal Communications Commission Regulation Part 15

D. National Electric Code

E. Designed to current UBC or IBC standards

F. FCC Class A Compliant

1.03 SUBMITTAL

A. The electronic LED display manufacturer shall provide a complete technicalsubmittal within 60 days of contract award and shall not proceed with LEDMatrix manufacture until the submittal is approved.

B. Submit:1. All LED display manufacturer qualifications, as specified herein.2. LED display shop drawing.3. LED display Riser diagram.4. AC Site Power Requirements, including legs and Amps per leg.5. LED display control software operator’s manual.6. LED display installation and maintenance manual.

SECTION 104000 LARGE MATRIX DISPLAY

Section 104000 - 2 of 7

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. LED Display Manufacturer shall: 1. Have been in the business of manufacturing permanently mounted outdoor LED

displays for a minimum period of 15 years prior to the contract bid date. An “LED” display contains pixels constructed solely of high-intensity discrete LEDs.

2. Have in operation at bid date a minimum of 100 large outdoor permanently mounted LED displays as defined above. Each of these LED displays shall have operated successfully for a minimum period of one (1) year prior to the contract bid date.

3. Experience with manufacturing the following types of electronic sign products shall not satisfy the requirements of this LED display specification:

a. Indoor displays of any size or type b. Back-lit displays c. Any type of matrix display that can be programmed to show a nearly infi-

nite quantity of messages.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide 5 years of parts coverage.

B. Provide toll-free service coordination.

C. Provide a toll-free help desk number that will be staffed from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. Central Time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LED Display

A. LED Display 1. Manufacture: Daktronics 2. Model: Large Matric GS6 Display, GS6-72x135-26.42-RGB-DF

B. Cabinet Construction 3. Cabinet dimensions 6’ 2-7/8” high by 11’ 11-3/8 wide. The front-to-back

cabinet depth shall not exceed 12 inches. 4. The cabinet shall contain a full LED matrix measuring a minimum of 72 pixel

rows high by 135 pixel columns wide. 5. Cabinet display configuration is:


Section 104000 - 3 of 7

a. Two-View (2V), two one sided displays typically installed back-to-back and show same content on both sides.

6. The distance from the center of one line or column of pixels to the center of all adjacent lines or columns shall be 26.42 both horizontally and vertically.

7. Maximum display power per face shall not exceed 1900 watts when 100% of the pixels are operating at their maximum possible drive current.

8. Cabinet weight per face shall not exceed 580 lbs. 9. Display shall operate from the following power sources: 120/240 VAC, 60 Hz

single-phase, including neutral and earth ground. 10. Display shall operate in a minimum ambient temperature range of -40° to

+120°F (-40 to +50°C) and to a 95% humidity. 11. Internal display component hardware (nuts, bolts, screws, standoffs, rivets,

fasteners, etc.) shall be fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum, nylon, or other durable corrosion-resistant materials suitable for the signage application.

12. Electrical display components shall be 100% solid-state. 13. The presence of ambient radio signals and magnetic or electromagnetic

interference, including those from power lines, transformers, and motors, shall not impair performance of the display system.

C. Housing Frame 1. Display materials shall use non-corrosive materials or have a protective

coating so they shall be anti-corrosive and not degrade or oxidize. 2. The display shall be rear ventilated with adequate ventilation provided by the

use of fans. 3. Steel mounting points that can be used for mounting purposes shall be

provided with the display and have the ability to be adjusted for alternative mounting methods.

4. Shall include lifting supports that can be removed after installation.

D. Exterior Finish 1. The LED display border pieces shall be coated with an automotive-grade

acrylic urethane paint.

E. Front Face Construction 1. To meet the display readability requirements, the front face must be

constructed in such a manner that it provides high contrast, low sunlight reflection and durability in all weather and site conditions.

2. Minimum features of front face shall: a. Provide UV resistance to prevent discoloring. b. Include horizontal louvers for contrast enhancement. c. Include vertical ribbing for contrast enhancement d. Use surface materials in the active LED area, such as metal, plas-

tic, or other face materials, designed for low sunlight reflectivity.

F. Serviceability


Section 104000 - 4 of 7

1. The display housing shall provide safe and convenient front service access for all modular assemblies, components, wiring, and other materials located within the housing.

2. All internal components shall be removable and replaceable by a single technician with basic hand tools.

3. Service access shall be easily obtained by removal of one or more modules in front of the associated internal component.

4. Each module should allow simple removal with a single latch system. 5. Displays shall be designed with service features that minimize potential bodily

harm.

2.02 DISPLAY COMPONENTS

A. LED display modules shall be constructed for good readability, long life, and ease of service. Each display module shall be constructed as follows: 1. Each module within the product family shall be designed with the same

physical footprint of 12.48” x 15.59”. 2. All modules and their components shall be fully encapsulated and sealed to

meet IP-67 standards. 3. An LED module shall consist of LEDs with all drive electronics mounted on

a single Printed Circuit Board (PCB). 4. LEDs shall be auto-inserted in order to maintain quality and uniformity of the

LEDs within each LED module. 5. All PCBs shall be wave-soldered to ensure uniformity, quality, and durability

of all solder joints. 6. All PCBs shall be cleaned in a manner so as not to contain more than 2 parts

per million contaminants. 7. Module signal and electrical connections shall be of the positive locking and

removable type. Removal of a module from the display shall not require a de-soldering operation.

8. Data to the modules shall be redundant in that the signal can reach the module from multiple directions in the event of a loss in signal path from either direction.

9. All LED display modules in a single display shall be identical in construction and interchangeable throughout the display with the ability to be field calibrated.

10. All module rows shall include continuous louvers over the LEDs for sunlight shading and enhanced contrast.

11. Modules shall be individually attached to the cabinet frame. 12. Removal of one or more modules shall not affect the display’s structural

integrity. 13. The distance from the center of one line or column of pixels to the center of

all adjacent lines or columns shall be 26.42mm both horizontally and vertically.

14. The failure of a single pixel, module or power supply shall not cause the failure of any other pixel, module or power supply in the display.


Section 104000 - 5 of 7

15. All modules shall have no less than a 140° horizontal half-intensity viewing angle and a readability angle of 160° horizontal.

16. The transition of the viewing intensity shall be consistent throughout the viewing cone.

B. Pixels shall be constructed with discrete LEDs, and these discrete LEDs shall

conform to the following specifications: 1. LEDs shall be non-diffused, ultra-bright, solid-state light emitting diodes. 2. The red LEDs shall be constructed of AlInGaP technology and the green and

blue LEDs shall be constructed of InGaN technology. 3. Each color of LEDs used in all LED displays provided for this contract shall

be from the same bin. 4. LED half-life shall be an estimated minimum of 100,000 hours. 5. Display shall have a minimum intensity of 10,000 cd/m2 for RGB maximum

light output, 4,500 cd/m2 for Red maximum light output, and 6,000 cd/m2 for Amber maximum light output.

C. Power Supply 1. All power supplies shall be regulated, auto-ranging AC to DC power, with

protection for the LED pixel, LED display and driver circuitry in the event of power spikes or surges.

2. Each power supply and their connectors shall be fully sealed to protect from corrosive environmental factors meeting IP-67 standards.

D. Internal Wiring 1. Wiring for LED display modules and other internal components shall be

installed in the housing in a neat and professional manner. 2. Wiring shall not impede the removal of display modules, power supplies or

other display components. 3. Wires shall not make contact with or be bent around sharp metal edges. 4. All wiring shall conform to the National Electric Code.

E. The display shall be protected from electrical spikes and transients.

F. The manufacturer shall provide an earth-ground lug on the display.

2.03 DISPLAY PERFORMANCE

A. Display Capability 1. The LED display shall present messages that are continuous, uniform, and

unbroken in appearance. 2. The LED display shall be capable of producing 281 trillion colors for RGB

and 4096 shades of color for monochrome red or amber at all dimming levels.


Section 104000 - 6 of 7

3. Each display pixel shall be composed of one each – red, green, and blue LEDS or one red or one amber

4. The LED display shall be capable of displaying all true type fonts. 5. The display shall be able to display messages composed of any combination

of alphanumeric text, punctuation symbols, graphic images, and pre-canned video files.

6. Video and message files shall have up to a 30 frame per second playback capability.

B. Controller 1. The display’s controller shall be able to run independently from a controlling

computing device allowing the display to operate even when the controlling device is unhooked or turned off.

2. Communication protocol shall support other matrix products from the vendor such as other outdoor or indoor displays of varying sizes and/or colors.

3. Each controller shall be connected to a light sensor allowing each LED display to automatically adjust brightness according to display direction and lighting conditions.

4. The controller shall allow connection to a temperature sensor that provides accurate site temperatures.

5. Active presentations, stored presentations, schedules, display configuration, time and date shall be stored in non-volatile memory. No external power or battery backup will be required to maintain this data.

C. Control and Communications

1. The display controller should be DHCP-enabled and allow for static IP addressing.

2. Each single-face display shall be controlled and monitored by its own LED controller.

3. The LED controller shall be able to receive instructions from and provide information by accessing the Venus Control Suite using the following communication modes: a. Ethernet Bridge Radio

2.04 CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. Control Software: Display content and scheduling shall be via Venus Control Suite (VCS) cloud-based solution. Software to be hosted on manufacturer’s serv-ers at no cost to the customer. Web browser access to the solution to support iOS Safari, Android Chrome, Internet Explorer v11+, Microsoft Edge, Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox.

B. Basic content creation to be performed via browser-based online editor. C. Expanded content creation tools available via PC-compatible Content Studio

download.


Section 104000 - 7 of 7

D. Supports import of images (PNG, BMP, GIF, JPG, PSD) and video files (AVI, MPG, MP4, MOV) in both browser-based and downloadable content utilities.

E. Sign to be added to existing customer VCS account.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Mounting structure to be installed by contractor to support desired displays in all locations. Verify that separate conduit is in place for power and data to display, unless fiber is being used. Verify that all control equipment has access to 120 VAC.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Support structure design depends on the mounting methods, display size, and weight. The structure design is critical and should be done only by a qualified in-dividual. It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the structure and mount-ing hardware are adequate.

B. It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the installation meet local stand-ards. The mounting hardware shall be capable of supporting all components to be mounted.

C. All mounted displays must be inspected by a qualified structural engineer. D. Possible power and signal entrances are designated by etched markings. Separate

conduit must be used to route the power, signal in wires, and signal out wires. E. Displays must be grounded according to the provisions outlined in Article 250 of

the National Electrical Code. The display must be connected to earth-ground. Proper grounding is necessary for reliable equipment operation and protects the equipment from damaging electrical disturbances and lightning.

END OF SECTION

Section 116833 - 1 of 6

SECTION 11 6833

ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT – DUGOUT SHADE STRUCTURE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to furnish and install the athletic equipment, as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Athletic equipment shall include, but not be limited to: 1. AIW12.5X30 - ADVANCED IRON WORKS Dugout 12’6”W x 30’L

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Examine contract documents for requirements that affect work of this section. Other specification divisions and sections that directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to:

1. Division 03 – Concrete; Sections: Cast-in-Place Concrete

2. Division 31 – Earthwork; Sections: Excavation and Backfill an Establishment of Sub-Grade Elevations

3. Division 32 – Exterior Improvements; Sections: Athletic and Recreational Surfacing, Concrete and Asphalt

1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.

1. National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) 2. National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA) 3. Manufacturers Data and Recommended Installation Requirements

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Product Data

SECTION 116833 Athletic Field Equipment - Dugout Shade Structure

Section 116833 - 2 of 3

1. Provide manufacturers product data prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners representatives review. B. Shop Drawings 1. Provide drawings of the manufacturers recommended installation and foundation requirements prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners representatives review. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers warranties shall pass to the Owner and certification made that the product

materials meet all applicable grade trademarks or conform to industry standards and in-spection requirements.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Materials delivered to the site shall be examined for damage or defects in shipping. Any

defects shall be noted and reported to the Owners representative. Replacements, if nec-essary, shall be immediately reordered, so as to minimize any conflict with the construc-tion schedule. Sound materials shall be stored above ground under protective cover or indoors so as to provide proper protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIW12.5X30 - ADVANCED IRON WORKS Dugout 12’6”W x 30’L A. BASE: AIW12.5X30 - Advanced Iron Works Dugout 12’6”W x 30’L as Manu-

factured and Supplied by Advanced Iron Works. Local Representation: Play By Design Inc. 2929 E 56th Place Tulsa, OK 74105 Becky Thomaselli 918-770-1336

B. DESIGN CRITERIA:

1. Building Code: ASCE 7-10 2. Maximum Wind Speed Rating: 140mph, Exposure Category C 3. Maximum Ground Snow Load: 35psf 4. Seismic Design: Category D 5. Roof Pitch: 2” Rise Back-to-Front

SECTION 116833 Athletic Field Equipment - Dugout Shade Structure

Section 116833 - 3 of 3

C. COMPONENTS:

1. Advanced Iron Works Dugout: a. Overall Dimensions: 12’6”W x 30’L b. Structural Columns Fabricated of:

i. 6” x 6” x 3/16” (0.1875”) Structural Steel Tube with Factory Pre-Drilled 7” x 7” x 1/2” (0.50”) A36 Steel Base Mounting Plates

ii. Fully Welded and Bolted Construction iii. Maximum Allowable Spacing Between Structural Steel Col-

umns is Fifteen (15’) On-Center c. Roof Frame Fabricated of:

i. 6” x 4” x 3/16” (0.1875”) Structural Steel Rectangular Perime-ter, Transverse, and Longitudinal Roof Tubes

ii. Fully Welded and Bolted Construction d. Structural Steel Columns and Roof Frame Receive a Zinc Powder

Coated Primer and Coated Finish, Various Standard and Custom Col-ors Available. Color to be selected by Owner.

e. Roofing Material is 24 Gauge, Berridge Deep-Deck Style Corrugated Metal with J-Channel Drip Cap Installed on Front and Sides, Various Standard Paint Finish Colors Available. Color to be selected by Own-er.

f. Structural Columns Attached to Roof Structure with Galvanized Hardware

g. Includes Carbon Steel Anchoring Hardware h. Model Specific Hardware Kit and Installation Instructions i. Contractor to provide Stamped and Sealed Drawings and Calculations

by a Oklahoma Licensed Professional Engineer of Record in the State of Project Location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. All Dugouts shall be installed as recommended per manufacturer's written instruc-

tions and as indicated on the drawings. Concrete anchoring foundations to be de-termined by the manufactures licensed engineer based on local soil conditions and building codes. Installer should have a minimum of five (5) Dugout installations or similar experience in the previous three (3) years.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS


SECTION 260050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. All conditions imposed by these documents shall be applicable to all portions of the work under this Division. Certain specific paragraphs of said references may be referred to hereinafter in this Division. These references are intended to point out specific items to the Contractor, but in no way relieve him of the responsibility of reading and complying with all relevant parts of the entire Specification.

B. The Contractor shall examine and coordinate with all Contract Drawings and Specifications, and all Addenda issued. Failure to comply shall not relieve him of responsibility. The omission of details of other portions of the work from this Division shall not be used as a basis for a request for additional compensation.

C. The specific features and details for other portions of the work related to the construction in progress or to the existing building(s) shall be determined by examination at the site.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The requirements contained in this Section apply to all work performed under Division 26 of these Specifications.

B. The work covered by this Division of the Specifications comprises the furnishing of labor, material, equipment, transportation, tools and services, and performing operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of the work in accordance with the applicable Contract Documents, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

C. Refer to other Divisions of the Specifications for related work.

1.3 DEFINITION OF “CONTRACTOR”

A. Where the word “Contractor” is used under any Section of this Division of the Specifications, it shall mean the Contractor engaged to execute the work included under that Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Process shop drawings and submittal data to ensure that the proposed materials, equipment and devices conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and that there are no omissions or duplications. Provide layouts, fabrication information and data for systems, materials, equipment and devices proposed for the project.

B. Shop drawings shall be drawn on a scale not less than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot showing actual dimensions. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Disconnect switches. 2. Circuit breakers and fuses.



3. Materials: Conduit, conductors, connectors, supports, etc. 4. Lighting fixtures, lamps and control systems/devices. 5. Wiring devices.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Submittals and Shop Drawings that require modifications to other systems and trades shall be the sole responsibility of the submitting contractor to coordinate and pay for the modifications required by other systems and trades.


A. Materials, equipment and devices shall be new and of the quality specified, and shall be free from defects at the time of installation. Materials, equipment and devices damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged or found defective prior to acceptance by the Owner shall not be repaired at the job site, but shall be replaced with new materials, equipment or devices identical with those damaged, unless specifically approved otherwise by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Wherever a UL standard has been established for a particular type of material, equipment or device, each item of such material, equipment or device provided on this project shall meet the requirements of the UL standard in every way, and shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.



1.7 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work of every description in connection with this Division of the Specifications. The Contractor shall specifically and distinctly assume, and does so assume, all risk for damage or injury from whatever cause to property or person used or employed on or in connection with this work and of all damages or injury to any person or property wherever located, resulting from an action or operation under the Contract in connection with the work, and undertake the responsibility to defend the Owner against all claims on account of any such damage or injury.

B. The Contractor will be held responsible for the satisfactory execution and completion of the work in accordance with the true intent of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall provide without extra charge all incidental items required as part of the work, even though it may not be specifically indicated. If the Contractor has reason for objecting to the use of any material, equipment, device or method of construction as indicated, he shall make report of such objections to the Owner’s Representative, obtain proper approval and adjustment to the Contract, and shall proceed with the work.

1.8 TERMINOLOGY

A. Whenever the words “furnish,” “provide,” “furnish and install,” “provide and install,” and similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials, equipment and devices described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division, complete for operation, unless specifically noted to the contrary.

B. It is also the intent, unless specifically noted to the contrary, that all materials, equipment and devices described and specified under this Division of the Specifications be similarly furnished, installed and connected under this Division, whether or not a phrase as described in the preceding paragraph has been actually included.

1.9 ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND CODES

A. It shall be the Contractor’s duty to perform the work and provide the materials covered by these Specifications in conformance with all ordinances and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All work herein shall conform to all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations of the local utility companies.

C. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permit and connection fees as required for the complete installation of the specified systems, equipment, devices and materials.

D. The Contractor shall obtain permits, plan checks, inspections and approvals applicable to the work as required by the regulatory authorities. Fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits, inspections and approvals shall be assumed and paid by the Contractor. The pro-rata costs, if any, for utilities serving this property will be paid for by the Owner and shall not be included as part of this Contract.

E. The work shall be in accordance with, but shall not be limited to, the requirements of:

1. National Fire Protection Association. 2. National Electrical Code. 3. National Safety Code.



4. State of Oklahoma Safety Codes. 5. State of Oklahoma Building Codes. 6. City Building Codes and amendments.

F. Codes and standards referred to are minimum standards. Where the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications exceed those of the codes and regulations, the Drawings and Specifications govern.

1.10 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE DESCRIPTION

A. Materials, equipment and devices shall be of the best quality customarily applied in quality commercial practice, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers. Each major component shall bear a nameplate giving the name and address of the manufacturer, and the catalog number or designation of the component.

B. Materials, equipment and devices furnished under this Division of the Specifications shall be essentially the standard product of the specified manufacturer, or where allowed, an alternate manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same kind or class of a specific item are required, these shall be the products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of one manufacturer.

C. In describing the various materials, equipment and devices, in general each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical items. Also, where the description is only general in nature, exact sizes, duties, space arrangements, horsepower requirements and other data shall be determined by reference to the Contract Documents.

D. Space allocations for materials, equipment and devices have been made on the basis of present and know future requirements and the dimensions of items of equipment or devices of a particular manufacturer whether indicated or not. The Contractor shall verify that all materials, equipment and devices proposed for use on this project are within the constraints of the allocated space.


A. Materials, equipment, devices, and workmanship shall comply with applicable local, county, state and national codes, laws and ordinances, utility company regulations and industry standards.

B. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any such difference. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with local codes, law and ordinances, industry standards or other governing regulations, the work shall be corrected of noncompliance deficiencies with the Contractor bearing all costs.

C. In addition to the aforementioned ordinances, industry standards published by the following organizations shall apply.

1. AABM - American Association of Battery Manufacturers. 2. AIA - American Institute of Architects. 3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute. 4. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. 5. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association. 6. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories. 7. FM - Factory Mutual.



8. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Associated. 9. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 10. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society. 11. IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance. 12. NBS - National Bureau of Standards. 13. NEC - National Electrical Code. 14. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. 15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 16. NESC - National Electrical Safety Code. 17. NETA - National Electrical Testing Association. 18. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 19. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

D. Where the Contract Documents exceed the above requirements, the Contract Documents shall govern. In no case shall work be installed contrary to or below the minimum legal standards.

1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The interrelation of the Drawings (including the schedules) and the Specifications are as follows:

1. The Drawings establish quantities, locations, dimensions and details of materials, equipment and devices. The schedules on the Drawings indicate the capacities, characteristics and components.

2. The Specifications provide written requirements for the quality, standard and nature of the materials, equipment, devices and construction systems.

B. The Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as being compatible; therefore, the work called for by one and not by the other shall be furnished and installed as though called for by both. Resolution of conflicts between Drawings and Specifications shall be as follows:

1. If the Drawings and Specifications disagree in themselves, or with each other, the Contractor’s pricing shall be based on furnishing and installing the most expensive combination of quality and quantity of work indicated. In the event of this type of disagreement, the resolution shall be determined by the Architect/Engineer.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for bringing any conflicts in the Drawings and the Specifications to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to any work being performed.

3. In general, if there is conflict between the Drawings and Specifications, the Drawings shall govern the Specifications.

4. Where the Specifications do not fully agree with schedules on the Drawings, the schedules shall govern. Actual numerical dimensions indicated on the Drawings govern scale measurements and large-scale details govern small-scale drawings.

5. Materials, equipment and devices called for on the Drawings and not indicated herein, shall be completely provided and installed as though it were fully described herein.

6. Materials, equipment and devices called for herein shall be completely provided and installed, whether or not it is fully detailed, scheduled or indicated on the Drawings.

C. The Contractor shall examine the Drawings and Specifications of the other portions of the work for fixtures and finishes in connection with this work. The Contractor shall carefully examine the Drawings to determine the general construction conditions, and shall familiarize himself with all limitations caused by such conditions.

D. When discrepancies exist between scale and dimension, or between the Drawings of the various portions of the work, they shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for further



instruction, whose instructions shall be final and binding and work promptly resumed without any additional cost to the Owner.

E. Review the construction details of the building(s) as illustrated on the Drawings of the various portions of the work and be guided thereby. Route conduits and set all boxes as required by the pace of the general construction.

F. The Drawings diagrammatically show the sizes and locations of the various equipment and devices, and the sizes of the major interconnecting wires, without showing exact details as to elevations, offsets, control wiring and other installation requirements. Carefully layout the work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to avoid obstructions and to permit proper grading of pipe associated with other portions of the work. Determine the exact location of equipment and devices and connections thereto by reference to the submittals and rough-in drawings, and by measurements at the site. Make minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site, or directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner.

G. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe and illustrate systems which will not interfere with the structure of the building(s), fit into the available spaces, and ensure complete and satisfactory operating installations. Prepare installation drawings for all critical areas illustrating the installation of the work in this Division as related to the work of all other Divisions and correct all interferences with the other portions of the work or with the building structures before the work proceeds.

H. The Drawings do not indicate the existing electrical installations other than to identify modifications or extensions thereto. Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payment in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installation or installing any new or temporary work under this Division.

1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Where a single manufacturer is mentioned by trade name or manufacturer’s name, unless specifically noted otherwise, it is the only manufacturer that will be accepted.

B. Where multiple manufacturers are listed, none other than those manufacturers will be accepted, unless otherwise noted.

C. It shall be understood that space allocations have been made on the basis of present and known future requirements and the dimensions of items of equipment or devices of a particular manufacturer whether indicated or not. If any item of equipment or device is offered in substitution which differs substantially in dimension or configuration from that indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, provide as part of the submittal 1/4 equals 1 foot scaled drawing showing that the substitute can be installed in the space available without interfering with other portions of the work or with access for operations and maintenance in the completed project.

D. Where substitute equipment or devices requiring different arrangement or connections from that indicated is accepted by the Architect/Engineer, install the equipment or devices to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the Contract Documents, making all incidental changes in piping, ductwork, or wiring resulting from the equipment or device selection without any additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall pay all additional costs incurred by other portions of the work in connection with the substituted equipment or device.



E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material, equipment or device offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specific item when, in their opinion, the quality of the item and/or the appearance is involved, and it is deemed that an evaluation of the item may be better made by visual inspection.

F. When any request for a substitution of material, equipment or device is submitted and rejected, the item named in the Contract Documents shall be furnished. Repetitive submittal of substitutions for the same item will not be considered.

1.14 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare installation drawings for coordinating the work of this Division with the work of other Divisions, to illustrate its concealment in finished spaces, to avoid obstructions, and to demonstrate the adaptability of any item of material, equipment or device in the space upon which the Contract Documents are based.

B. Use these drawings in the field for the actual installation of this work. Provide three (3) copies, not for approval, to the Architect/Engineer for his information, review and record.

1.15 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION

A. In no case shall the Contractor provide a class of material, equipment, device or workmanship less than that required by the Contract Documents or applicable codes, regulations, ordinances or standards. All modifications which may be required by a local authority having legal jurisdiction over all or any part of the work shall be made by the Contractor without any additional charge. In all cases where such authority requires deviations from the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor shall report it to the Owner’s Representative and shall secure his approval before the work is started.

B. The work shall be performed by properly licensed technicians skilled in their respective trades. All materials, equipment and devices shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and in the best standard practice to bring about results of a first class condition.

C. The NECA “Standards of Installation” as published by the National Electrical Contractors Association shall be considered a part of these Specifications, except as specifically modified by other provisions contained in these Specifications.

1.16 WARRANTY

A. All materials, equipment, devices and workmanship shall be warranted for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance by the Architect/Engineer for beneficial use by the Owner, except that where specific equipment is noted to have extended warranties. The warranty shall be in accordance with AIA Document A201. The Contractor shall be responsible for the registration of these warranties so that the Owner can make all proper claims should future need develop.

B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner, the name, address and telephone number of those persons responsible for service on systems and equipment covered by the warranty.



1.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

A. When any equipment is operable, and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, the Contractor may do so provided that he properly supervises the operation, and retains full responsibility for the equipment operated. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall clean the equipment properly, make required adjustments and complete punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner.

1.18 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Provide the services of competent engineers and/or technicians acceptable to the Architect/Engineer to instruct other representatives of the Owner in the complete and detailed operation of each item of equipment or device of all the various electrical systems. These instructions shall be provided for whatever periods may be necessary to accomplish the desired results. Upon completion of these instructions, the Contractor shall obtain a letter of release, acknowledged by the Owner or his authorized representative, stating the dates on which the various kinds of instruction were given, and the personnel to whom the instructions were given.

B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for proper maintenance of equipment and systems until the instructions have been given to the Owner’s personnel and the letter of release acknowledged.

C. In providing the instructions to the Owner’s personnel, the written operating and maintenance manuals shall be followed in all instances, and the Owner’s personnel shall be familiarized with such manuals. Operating and maintenance manuals used for instructions shall include wiring diagrams, manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists (with sources identified), and other data as appropriate for each system.

1.19 SCHEDULE AND SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall meet and cooperate with the Owner and Architect/Engineer to schedule and sequence this work so as to ensure meeting scheduled completion dates and avoid delaying other portions of the work. Work requiring special sequencing shall be at no additional cost to the Owner and shall have no impact on the schedule.

1.20 INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. Obtain timely inspections of the installation by the regulatory authorities. Remedy any deficiencies to the satisfaction of the inspecting official.

B. Upon final completion of the work, obtain certificates of acceptance from the regulatory authorities. Deliver the certificates to the Architect/Engineer for transmission to the Owner.

1.21 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment and devices in a manner to permit access to all surfaces or components, requiring such access, without the need to disassemble other unrelated parts of the work.

B. Equipment specified to be factory assembled and tested prior to shipment shall not be dissembled at the job site and reassembled at its final location. Apparatus not so specified may be disassembled and reassembled in the proper location.



C. Furnish all scaffolding, rigging and hoisting required for the installation of all the work.

D. Large equipment assemblies and components which will be installed in the building, and which are too large to permit access through doorways, stairways or shafts, shall be brought to the site and placed in the appropriate spaces before the enclosing structure is complete.

1.22 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS

A. Provide foundations for electrical equipment. This shall consist of concrete housekeeping pads constructed in accordance with the details on the Drawings, these Specifications, manufacturer’s recommendations and Division 3.

B. All pads shall be 4” high and extend a maximum 2” beyond that actual equipment size. Coordinate the proper size of the pad with the equipment furnished. Furnish all anchor bolts and other accessories required for casting the concrete pad. After the equipment is set on the pad, the equipment shall be fully grouted to the pad and all void spaces shall be filled with a non-shrinking grout.

1.23 SLEEVES

A. Each conduit, regardless of material, which passes through a concrete slab, masonry wall, or roof or portion of the building structure shall be free from the structure and shall pass through a sleeve.

B. All sleeves shall be constructed from electrical-metallic tubing or equivalent weight galvanized steel tubing and shall be flush on both sides of the surface penetrated, unless noted otherwise. All sleeves penetrating the roof areas shall extend a minimum 10 inches above the roof with approved weatherproof counterflashing attached to the conduit above the roof. The sleeves shall be sized to allow free passage of the conduit to be inserted.

C. Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade or in moist areas shall be constructed of galvanized rigid steel and shall be designed with a suitable flange in the center to form a waterproof passage. After the conduit has been installed in the sleeves, the void space around the conduit shall be caulked with jute twine and filled with an asphalt-base compound to ensure a waterproof penetration.

1.24 ESCUTCHEONS

A. In each finished space, provided a chromium plated, sectional escutcheon on each conduit, or hanger rod penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling.

B. Size escutcheons and collars to fit snugly around conduit and rods.

C. Where required, provide escutcheons with set screws so that they fit snugly against the finished surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SITE ELECTRICAL


Section 260050-10 of 14

A. The site electrical work shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and installation of necessary materials and making arrangements for the connection of electrical and telephone utilities and for underground conduit.

B. All site electrical work shall be in accordance with latest National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 300, and service installation standards of the serving utility company(s).

C. The location of the electrical service entrance shall be coordinated with the electric utility company and with all other trades. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the electrical service.

D. Provide materials in accordance with other sections of these Specifications.

E. The location of the telephone service entrance shall be coordinated with the telephone utility company and with all other trades. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the telephone service.

F. The location of all underground electrical work such as service for parking lot lighting, site lighting, site security, etc. shall be coordinated with all other trades.

G. Underground installation of more than one conduit shall be in a “ductbank” arrangement. All conduits shall be laid so joints are staggered.

H. Pour a red colored concrete envelope minimum 3” thick over electrical and telephone service conduit.

I. The electrical service entrance shall have a full concrete enclosed ductbank, in addition to the red colored concrete, with reinforcing rods installed.

J. Perform excavation, shoring, backfilling and concrete work in connection with electrical work in accordance with other Divisions of the Specifications.

K. All underground conduit shall be sloped away from the building to negate water entering the building through the conduit system.

L. Provide underground warning tape 6” to 12” below finished surface along entire length of underground conduit or ductbank. Provide a separate length of tape every 24” in width of ductbank. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling.

M. The locations, elevations and voltage of electrical lines and the location of the telephone lines included within the area of this work are indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications in accordance with information received by the Owner.

N. The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify, to his own satisfaction, the location and elevation of all utilities and shall adequately inform himself as to their relation to the work.

O. Work associated with existing utility lines to be abandoned or removed, located within the scope of this project, will be coordinated by the Contractor (with the Owner’s oversight) with the respective utility.

P. Existing utility lines not indicated but encountered during construction shall be protected, relocated or capped as directed by the Owner’s Representative. All precautions shall be exercised to prevent damage to existing lines not shown, but should work become necessary, it must be authorized prior to execution except in an emergency situation.


Section 260050-11 of 14

Q. Before beginning excavations of any nature whatsoever, the Contractor shall make an attempt to locate all underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds of the area to be excavated. The Contractor shall then proceed with caution in his excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a resultant loss of service.

R. Should damage result to any utility through the Contractor’s negligence or failure to comply with the above directive, he shall be liable for such damage and for all expense incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities.

S. Repair of damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent undamaged portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. All excavating, trenching and backfilling shall generally be performed in accordance with the procedures and using the materials as described in Division 2. Provide all excavation required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. After the work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material.

B. Bottoms of trenches shall be cut to grade. Should rock be encountered, same shall be excavated to a depth of six (6) inches below bottom of conduit and space shall be filled and tamped as specified hereinafter. Should it be required to lay conduit on fill, fill shall first be compacted.

C. All conduit shall be installed promptly after excavation has been done so as to keep excavations open as short a time as possible.

D. Trenches shall be excavated to the required depths. Depth of cover shall be as required by the NEC or as indicated on Drawings. Keep banks of trenches as nearly vertical as possible, and provide adequate shoring where required.

E. When excavation is below the shale or subgrade level, backfill with granular fill or approved backfill material from the site to a depth of 12 inches above top of conduit, but in no case less than 1’-0” below the subgrade surface. The remainder of backfill to the shale or subgrade surface shall be an impervious material and shall be compacted at not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as defined by ASTM D-698. At all times, the top of the subgrade shall be kept in such condition that it will drain readily and effectively. Backfill above the subsurface shall be granular fill or approved select backfill from site.

F. Beyond building walls or above the shale or subgrade level, backfill with sand or granular fill to a depth of 12 inches above top of conduit and remainder of trench filled with approved select backfill material from the site.

G. Bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the maximum fall. Where rock is excavated below the bottom of the conduit, and before laying the conduit, fill the space between the bottom of the conduit and the rock surface with sand, thoroughly tamped.

H. Trenches dug in fill shall have the conduit supported down to load-bearing soil. After conduits have been inspected and approved by the Owner’s Representative, trenches shall be filled with approved backfill material which shall be firmly compacted, flooded if necessary and thoroughly tamped. Do not backfill with any fill containing rocks, frozen earth or debris.


Section 260050-12 of 14

I. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavements and repairing the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut all openings required to install the work or to repair any defective work. This cutting shall be performed under the Architect’s/Engineer’s direction and due diligence exercised to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in the wrong locations.

B. No cutting or drilling of any sort will be permitted in the webs of prestressed, precast concrete structural elements. Use core drills or power driven saws to cut openings in the flanges of other such structural elements; the use of reciprocating drills will not be permitted. The cutting of structural members without first having received written permission from the Architect/Engineer is prohibited.

C. Where openings are cut in fire-rated walls or floors, seal the annular space between the work installed and the fire-rated construction. Sealant, as applied, shall be fire rated to maintain the fire rating of the construction penetrated. Sealant shall be re-enterable (before fire) to alter penetrations. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

A. All penetrations in horizontal or vertical fire-rated construction shall be sealed using approved fire-rated sealing materials equivalent to the following:

1. Foam: Dow Corning 3-6548 RTV silicone foam, liquid component Part 4 (black) and liquid component Part B (off-white).

2. Sealant: Dow Corning 96-081 RTV silicone adhesive sealant. 3. Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard, mineral fiber matting, mineral fiber putty, as

selected by applicator.

B. Preparation: Remove combustible materials and loose impediments from penetration opening and involved surfaces. Remove free liquid and oil from penetration surfaces.

C. Installation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, install damming materials and sealant to cover and seal penetration openings; inject foam mixtures into openings.

3.4 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS

A. At all times take every precaution to properly protect apparatus from damage due to dust, dirt, water, etc. or from damage due to physical forces. Include the erection of temporary shelters as required, to adequately protect any apparatus stored at the site, the cribbing of any apparatus directly above the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question.

B. Responsibility for the protection of apparatus extend also to existing apparatus involved in this Division of the work, whether such apparatus is designated to be used temporarily and later removed, or is to be reused as a part of the permanent installation. Erect temporary sheltering structures, provide temporary bracing and supports, or cover equipment as required or directed to afford proper protection for that equipment.


Section 260050-13 of 14

C. The Contractor shall protect this work and the work of all other Contractors from damage by his work or workmen and shall make good any damage thus caused. He shall also be responsible for the proper protection of his equipment, machinery, materials and accessories delivered and installed on the job.

3.5 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF OTHER DIVISION’S EQUIPMENT

A. Verify the electrical requirements of all equipment furnished under other Divisions, separate contracts, or by the Owner. Install conduit, power wiring, control wiring, devices, etc. as require for complete operation of all equipment.

3.6 OPTION TO RELOCATE OUTLETS AND RELATED DEVICES

A. The location of power, data and telephone outlets, wall switches and other related devices may be relocated at the Owner’s option, at no additional cost to the Owner, to a point within 15 feet of their present location provided the Contractor is notified prior to installation.

3.7 Provide temporary utility services for construction and testing of systems in accordance with the requirements of Division l and Division 2.

3.8 COOPERATION AND CLEAN-UP

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to cooperate fully to keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. Upon the completion of the job, the Contractor shall immediately remove all of his tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

B. After the installation is complete, and before the equipment is energized, clean the interior and exterior of all equipment thoroughly. Clean equipment, removing all debris, rubbish and foreign materials. Each component shall be cleaned and all dust and other foreign material removed. Components shall be cleaned of oxidation. The inside and outside of all switchgear shall also be wiped clean with a lemon-oil rag after other cleaning is complete.

C. Any portion of the work requiring touch-up finishing shall be so finished to equal the specified finish on the product.

3.9 RECORD DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION FOR OWNER

A. The Contractor shall obtain at his own expense a complete set of prints on which to keep an accurate record of the installation of all materials, equipment and devices covered by the Contract. The record drawings shall indicate the location of all equipment and devices, and the routing of all systems. All piping and conduit buried in concrete slabs, walls and below grade shall be located by dimension; both horizontally and by vertical elevation, unless a surface mounted device in each space indicates the exact location. Obtain one complete reproducible set of the original drawings on which to neatly, legibly and accurately transfer all project related notations and deliver these drawings to the Architect/Engineer at job completion before final payment and delivery to the Owner. The above data, with the exception of the record drawings, shall be delivered prior to final acceptance.

B. The Contractor shall accumulate in duplicate during the job progress, the following data prepared in indexed 3-ring looseleaf, hard-back binders sized for 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets. No binder


Section 260050-14 of 14

shall exceed 3-1/2 inches thick. This data shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer for review and subsequent delivery to the Owner prior to final acceptance.

1. Warranties, guarantees and manufacturer’s directions on material, equipment and devices covered by the Contract.

2. Approved lighting fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 3. Copies of approved submittals and shop drawings. 4. Operating instructions for major apparatus and recommended maintenance procedures. 5. Copies of all other data and/or drawings required during construction. 6. Repair parts list of major apparatus, including name, address and telephone number of

local supplier or representative. 7. Tag charts and diagrams hereinbefore specified.

3.10 FINAL OBSERVATION

A. The purpose of the final observation is to determine whether the Contractor has completed the construction in accordance with the Contract Documents and that in the Owner Representative’s opinion the installation is satisfactory for final acceptance by the Owner.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that the installation is ready for final acceptance prior to calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation.

END OF SECTION 260050

SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Service Wire Co. 8. Southwire Company. 9. WESCO.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 or ASTM B 496 for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath.


1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Service Wire Co. 8. Southwire Company. 9. WESCO.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=12724

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457060592



















D. Circuits:

1. Single circuit and multi-circuit with color-coded conductors. 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

G. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

H. Armor: Steel or Aluminum, interlocked.

I. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. ILSCO. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.

C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.











3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.



3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."




This page intentionally left blank.

SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Foundation steel electrodes.




A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1) Test wells. 2) Ground rods. 3) Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO International Corporation. 3. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 4. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.












C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

J. Straps: Solid copper, cast-bronze clamp. Rated for 600 A.

K. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.

L. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts.

a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy. b. Listed for direct burial.

2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct burial.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.



1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

G. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.



3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are polymer concrete and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.

1. Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

H. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length.




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

G. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


SECTION 260529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

a. Hangers. b. Steel slotted support systems. c. Trapeze hangers. d. Clamps. e. Sockets. f. Saddles. g. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.

1. Include design calculations and details of trapeze hangers.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

SECTION 260529



b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Projectors.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. G-Strut. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

2. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.









SECTION 260529



D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) B-line, an Eaton business. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.












SECTION 260529



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

SECTION 260529



E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


SECTION 260529



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company 5. FSR Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation 7. Picoma Industries, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit 9. Robroy Industrial 10. Southwire Company 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation 13. Wheatland Tube Company

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.



2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation 4. CANTEX INC. 5. CertainTeed Corporation 6. Condux Internationall Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company 8. Kraloy 9. Lamson & Sessions 10. Niedax, Inc. 11. RACO; Hubbell 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group 13. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation 14. Wheatland Tube Company

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

E. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.



2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds 3. EGS/Appleton Electric 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company 5. FSR, Inc. 6. Hoffman 7. Hubbell Incorporated 8. Kraloy 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney 12. RACO; Hubbell 13. Robroy Industries 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation 17. Wiremold/Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.



2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company b. Carson Industries, LLC c. NewBasis d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. e. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. f. Synertech Moulded Products.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 23 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 575 mm Long) by 11

inches (280 mm) deep and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC or IMC.



2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC or IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC or Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations

include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Vehicle repair areas.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type

of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel or cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.



E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.



S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of air conditioned

spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature

change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.



AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and

encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel 9-inches deep, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.


Section 260533-10 of 10

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.


SECTION 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING


SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:



a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. CALPICO, Inc.

c. Metraflex Company (The).

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or equal:

a. HOLDRITE.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.











2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.



G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.


SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Color and legend requirements for raceways and conductors. 2. Labels. 3. Tapes and stencils. 4. Tags. 5. Signs. 6. Cable ties. 7. Fasteners for labels and signs.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145 for safety signs and labels.

D. Comply with NFPA 70E requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.



F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 240-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red.

4. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow.

5. Color for Neutral: White or gray. 6. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.

C. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.3 LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester or Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. A’n D Cable Products. b. Brady Corporation c. Brother International Corporation d. Emedco e. Grafoplast Wire Markers f. Hellermann Tyton g. Ideal Industrias, Inc. h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Panduit Corp. k. Seton Identification Products.

2. Minimum Nominal Size:

a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 TAPES AND STENCILS

A. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.


a. Brady Corporation b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc.

B. Underground-Line Warning Tape:


a. Brady Corporation b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. LEM Products, Inc. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Reef Industries, Inc. f. Seton Identification Products.

2. Tape:

a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.



b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

3. Color and Printing:

a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5.

b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE". c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.5 TAGS

A. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.023 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Grafoplast Wire Markers. e. LEM Products Inc. f. Marking Services, Inc. g. Panduit Corp. h. Seton Identification Products.

2.6 SIGNS

A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:


a. Brady Corporation b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc.

2. Engraved legend. 3. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch.











b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for

mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.7 CABLE TIES


a. Ideal Industries, Inc. b. Marking Services, Inc. c. Panduit Corp.

B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.






G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables over 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

J. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Source Panel and Circuit number.

K. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

L. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

M. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

N. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound color-coding bands to identify the phase.



D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic preprinted tags colored and marked to indicate phase, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation.

G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Marker tape or self-adhesive vinyl tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

I. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.

J. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.

K. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a stenciled legend.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Switchboards. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Pushbutton stations. i. Contactors. j. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.


SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES


SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Straight-blade convenience receptacles. 2. GFCI receptacles. 3. Toggle switches. 4. Wall plates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names:

1. Cooper: Copper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems. 3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Pass & Seymour: Pass& Seymour/Legrand.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.



D. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, 10 KA short circuit rating: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.; Commercial Grade Recepacles 20A-1125V NEMA 5-20R – BR20 and Weather Resistant Commercial Grade Receptacles 20A-125V NEMA 5-20R – WRBR20.

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; HBL 5361(single), 5362 (duplex). c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); 5361 (single), 5361 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A,

and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides

proper GFCI protection (self testings) 4. Tamper-resistant, weather resistant.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.; TWRBR20GY b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; GFR 5362SGGY c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; GFWT2-HGG d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); 2095TRWR-GRY.

C. Tamper-Resistant, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles:


a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; GFTR20 b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); 2095TR



2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Single Pole:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.; AH1221 AC Quiet Toggle Switches.

2) Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; HBL1221 3) Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; 1221-2 4) Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); CSB20AC1.

2. Two Pole:


1) Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.; AH1222 2) Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; HBL1222 3) Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; 1222-2 4) Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); CSB20AC2.

3. Three Way:


1) Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.; AH1223 2) Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; HBL1223 3) Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; 1223-2 4) Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); CSB20AC3.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


1) Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.

2) Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems; HBL1201 for 120 and 277 V. 3) Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; 1221-LH1 4) Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour);PS20AC1RPL for 120 V,

PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V..

2. Description: Single pole, with LED-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is off.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2114&mf=04&src=wd






B. Wet-Location, Damp Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover, listed for “while in use”

2.6 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.



7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. GFCI Receptacles: Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.


A. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is

unacceptable. c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. d. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. f. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


SECTION 262813 FUSES


SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits. b. Enclosed switches.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in PDF format.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.



3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the Project. Submit in PDF format.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type used.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Bussmann, an Eaton business. 2. Edison; a brand of Bussmann by Eaton. 3. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

1. Type RK-1: 250 or 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 3. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 4. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 5. Type T: 250-V, zero- to 1200-A rating, 200 kAIC, very fast acting.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.







E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 10 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch-high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay or Class J, time delay. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 4. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the field by Construction Manager.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF format.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in other sections, include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches. b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF format.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.



B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. ABB Inc. 2. Eaton. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Siemens Industry, Inc.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:

1. Single throw. 2. Three pole. 3. 240 or 600-V ac. As scheduled. 4. 1200 A and smaller. 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate

indicated fuses. 6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in

closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc.












B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eaton 2. General Electric Company 3. Siemens Industry, Inc. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric

B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.

C. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.

D. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated.

E. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.

F. Lugs shall be suitable for 167 deg F rated wire or 194 deg F rated wire, sized according to the 167 deg F temperature rating in NFPA 70.

G. Standards: Comply with UL 489 and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.



2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized galvanized steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12).

C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts.

D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be directly operable through the front cover of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 1) or directly operable through the dead front trim of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 3R). The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory.

3.2 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS

A. Enclosed Switches: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4X.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.



E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

C. Tests and Inspections for Switches:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.

a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

h. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.



b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.

c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer’s published data. If manufacturer’s published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test

results. 3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.


SECTION 265619 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING


SECTION 265619 – LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp

technology.

2. Luminaire supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.

4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

5. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring.

6. Photoelectric relays.

7. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved.



B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture indicated with factory-applied

finish.

D. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For luminaire supports.

1. Include design calculations for luminaire supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Luminaires.

2. Structural members to which equipment and luminaires will be attached.

3. Underground utilities and structures.

4. Existing underground utilities and structures.

5. Above-grade utilities and structures.

6. Existing above-grade utilities and structures.

7. Building features.

8. Vertical and horizontal information.

B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:

1. Luminaire.

D. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by

a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and photoelectric relays to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.



2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

2. Glass, Acrylic, and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100

of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products and complying with applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color

consistency among luminaires.

E. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

F. Mockups: For exterior luminaires, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations.

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed work.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

prior to shipping.




A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with

luminaire installation.

B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire

installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.

b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of

hazard by an NRTL.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

F. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

G. L70 lamp life of 35,000 hours.

H. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

I. Internal driver.

J. Nominal Operating Voltage: per drawings.



K. In-line Fusing: On the primary for each luminaire.

L. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use.

M. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

N. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum or Stainless steel. Form and support to

prevent warping and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses.

D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing

and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion

lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Housings:

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in

use.

2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be

located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal

viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:



a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install

new lamps.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application

and approved by manufacturer.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

E. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.



F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.

G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric

device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

K. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring

connections and wiring methods.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

A. Aim as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.

Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,

installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied

with a 50 percent overlap.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.



C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s):

a. IES LM-5.

b. IES LM-50.

c. IES LM-52.

d. IES LM-64.

e. IES LM-72.

2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and photocell

relays.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied

conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose.

Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are

defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.



SECTION 31 2219

SOFTBALL FIELD GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A Section Includes: 1. Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the site. 3. Provide and stockpile topsoil on site. 4. Dewatering excavations.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 1800 - Athletic and Recreational Surfacing 2. Section 32 9200.01 – Athletic Field Turf and Grasses

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 698 78 Tests Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil

Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb. Hammer and 12 in. Drop. 2. ANSI/ASTM D2922 Density of Soil in Place by the Nuclear Methods.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3300 – SUBMITTALS.

B. Samples: Submit a one gallon sample and material analysis results of imported topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be retested at the Contractor's expense and replaced.

C. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with SECTION 01 4000 – QUALITY

CONTROL SERVICES. 2. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports.

SECTION 312219 SOFTBALL FIELD GRADING



A. Laboratory Control: On site or Imported topsoil shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make tests of the soil from the selected source to

determine that it meets the specified requirements for imported topsoil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas.

B. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water.

C. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements outside the limits of

the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks.

2. Protect benchmarks. 3. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. 4. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other

methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. Monitor shoring system and surrounding ground surface during construction to detect movement. If movement becomes significant, take contingency steps to brace excavation and adjacent utility lines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. 3. Unsuitable Materials: Topsoil or unclassified fill will be declared as "unsuitable"

if any of the following conditions or matter and particles are present to a degree that is judged detrimental to the proposed use of the material: a. Moisture. b. Decayed or undecayed vegetation. c. Hardpan clay, heavy clay, or clay balls. d. Rubbish. e. Construction rubble. f. Sand or gravel. g. Rocks, cobbles, or boulders. h. Cementitious matter.



i. Foreign matter of any kind. 4. Unsuitable materials shall be disposed of properly and legally as "waste".

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 TOPSOIL

1. Strip topsoil from limits of grading areas, clean of grass, roots, rocks and debris to a depth of between 4" to 6", and stockpile for placement on all landscape and “open space” areas. Contractor shall investigate the site to his satisfaction to determine if suitable material is available on site to meet the specification for topsoil.

2. Imported topsoil shall be required for all softball fields a minimum depth of 4”. a. Contractor shall haul and place imported topsoil obtained from offsite sources

to construct the topsoil layer and various other details of the construction drawings. All costs related to such imported topsoil fill will be included in the contract price, and no additional or separate payment for imported fill will be due the Contractor.

b. Topsoil shall be secured from an approved offsite location. It shall be fertile, friable, natural loam containing a liberal amount of humus and shall be capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. It shall be free of stone lumps, clods of hard earth, plants or their roots, sticks, and other extraneous matter. Under no circumstances will topsoil be accepted unless it is free of the aforementioned contaminants. Contractor may use approved means of treating the topsoil to ensure its acceptability. Imported topsoil shall be rock free.

c. The soil texture shall be classified as sandy loam or loamy sand according to the "soil triangle" published by the United States Agriculture Department and the following criteria: 1.) Natural organic content: Not less than 1.5%. 2.) pH of Soil: Not more than 7.6. 3.) Soil texture shall be determined by utilizing processes as prescribed in

ASTM D 422 using the No. 10 and No. 270 sieves and a hydrometer analysis.

d. Provide an analysis of the imported soil and a one gallon sample to Owner’s representative.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation.

B. Set required lines and grades using a licensed surveyor.

C. Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points. 3.3 PREPARATION



A. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area.

B. Notify utility companies sufficiently in advance to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation.

C. Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area.

D. Protect and support utility services uncovered by excavation.

E. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade.

F. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended on Project Record Documents.

G. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed condition, discontinue affected work and notify Landscape Architect.

H. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded.

I. Subgrade soil of infield areas to a minimum depth of 5 inches, water and recompact. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor), within three percent points of the soil's optimum moisture content.

J. Scarify general subgrade soils in place to a depth of 6 to 8 inches and compact to between 90 and 95 percent for field areas, both at or above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D698.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the sod and infield materials. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated grades. Take care to prevent excavation

below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted.

2. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handled as specified.

B. Over cut planting and field areas to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 4" thick.



C. Maintain excavations to drain and be free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not be permitted.

D. Exercise extreme care in grading around existing features such as fences and drain inlets.

E. Do not disturb existing grades around existing trees except as otherwise noted. When excavation through roots is necessary, and after review by Landscape Architect, perform by hand and cut roots with sharp axe, prune trees to compensate for root loss.

F. Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with original Architect's direction.

G. Do not allow construction equipment to create "pumping" of soils.

H. Stockpile excavated clean fill for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated fill from site.

3.5 WASTING

A. Surplus excavated material not suitable or required for fill and backfill shall be removed and disposed of.

3.6 FILL AND BACKFILL

A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. Proof

roll, compact, and establish moisture content. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in horizontal layers not more than 6" deep, loose

measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized.

3. Fill material shall have a moisture content at or slightly above optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fill is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content.

4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage of walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers.

5. Proof roll exposed subgrade in paving areas with heavily loaded dump truck or similar acceptable construction equipment, to detect unsuitable soil conditions. Commence proof rolling operations after a suitable period of dry weather to avoid degrading acceptable subgrade surfaces. Make four passes over each section with proof rolling equipment, with the last two perpendicular to the first two.

6. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in-situ compaction. Backfill and compact to density equal to requirements for subsequent backfill material.



B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill below finish grade. 1. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water, and ground

surfaces are not frozen. 2. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and

approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 3. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not

more than 6" deep, loose measurement. 4. Site backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for

natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet or spongy subgrade surfaces. 5. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required

compaction density. 6. Make gradual changes in grade. Blend slopes into level areas.

3.7 COMPACTION

A. Compact each layer of earth fill and backfill thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured. 1. Compact each layer of fill to the density listed below as a function of the location.

The required density in each case is indicated as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test ASTM D 698.

2. Material under field areas shall be compacted to 95% compaction. 3. A large vibratory rolling machine as illustrated shall be used for compaction

during grading process:

3.8 FINISH GRADING

A. Site Grading: Shape and finish earthwork to bring the site to the finish grades and elevations shown on the drawings.



1. Finish grade to the finish contours and spot grades shown. Extend cuts and fills to feather out beyond the last finish contour or spot grade shown. Grade to uniform levels and slopes between points for which elevations are given, round off abrupt changes in elevation, and finish off smoothly. Finish grades shall slope to assure proper drainage.

2. The final grading of the field will be accomplished with a small light weight type tractor equipped with turf tires and laser equipment. (Motor graders not allowed for final grading).

3. Laser to be either conical or dual slope laser depending on the grading plan with the capability of achieving an accuracy of 1/8 of an inch in 100 feet.

4. The finished grade should be true to plane and grade within 1/4 of an inch when checked with a 20-foot straight edge.

5. Finish grade shall be properly compacted, dragged and ready for sod then be inspected by the landscape architect before the grassing operation. It is the intent of these specs to have a smooth surface without any bumps or undulations, that drains as designed.

6. All area's where grass meets other materials will be graded to allow for the thickness of the sod. Grading, infield materials, warning tracks, and sod installation will be the responsibility of the same contractor to insure a smooth transition from one material to the next.

7. Execute erosion control measures in accordance with the local ordinances. 3.9 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Prior to placing topsoil, scarify subgrade to a depth of 5". Following scarification, topsoil shall be spread in one 4" thick lift or as defined on the plans. Topsoil shall be compacted to the approximate density of undisturbed soil. If there is insufficient stockpiled topsoil from onsite sources to complete the work, bring in topsoil from offsite sources as needed.

B. After placement of topsoil, eliminate all low or hollow places that would allow water to stand or pond during rainfall or during operation of lawn irrigation systems. The area shall be free of all natural debris and shall also be free of all clods and rocks greater than 1” in diameter.

C. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from established grade elevation.

D. Provide uniform roundings at top and bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade. Correct irregularities and areas where water will stand.

E. Uniformly distribute topsoil to required grades; feather back to where grades remain unchanged.

3.10 PROTECTION, CLEAN UP AND EXCESS MATERIALS



A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and repair such damage that occurs.

B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water.

C. At locations where concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with earth, remove damaged earth and replace with clean material.

D. Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave work in clean finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal of debris and excess materials.

3.11 CONSTRUCTION STAKING

A. All field layouts must be staked using the coordinates and dimensions provided in the plans in addition to the grading and dimensional control plans. The contractor's surveyor shall stake all base locations and points of grade break in order to achieve a smooth and uniform grade throughout. Verify all grades and elevations are per plans.

END OF SECTION

Section 321243- 1 of 10

SECTION 32 1243

POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Porous pavement system.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 32 9223 – Sodding

B. Section 32 9300 – Planting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F 1951-08 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.

B. ASTM D 638-10 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

C. ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

D. AASHTO M6 Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Hydraulic Cement Concrete


A. The Grasspave2 (or approved equal) porous pavement system provides vehicular and pedestrian load support for grass areas, while protecting grass roots from harmful effects of traffic.

B. Major Components of the Complete System 1. Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units, assembled in rolls. 2. Engineered sand and gravel base course. 3. Hydrogrow (or approved equal) soil amendment and fertilizer, supplied with Grasspave2 (or approved equal). 4. Sand fill or USGA greens mix. 5. Selected grass from seed, hydroseeding/hydro-mulching. 6. Selected topsoil (only for seeded installation). 7. Mulch (needed only for seeded or hydroseeded installations).

SECTION 321243 POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING

Section 321243- 2 of 10

C. The Grasspave2 (or approved equal) grass paving units, sand, and base course work together to support imposed loading.

D. The Grasspave2 (or approved equal) grass paving units, Hydrogrow (or approved equal), and sand fill contribute to vegetation support.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per Oklahoma City General Conditions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit design detail showing proper cross-section.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of Grasspave2 (or approved equal) 10” x 10” section of Grasspave2 (or approved equal) material.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. Include methods for maintaining installed products.

E. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer signed certificate stating the product is made in the USA. 2. Submit Material Certificates for base course and sand (or USGA mix) fill

materials 3. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying material compliance of

polyethylene used to make Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units. 4. ISO Certificate certifying manufacturer’s quality management system is currently

registered to ISO 9001:2008 quality standards.

F. Deleted G. Substitutions: No material will be considered as an equivalent to the Grass-

pave2 (or approved equal) unit specified herein unless it meets all areas of this specification. Contractors seeking to supply what they represent as equivalent material must submit records, data, samples, certifications, and documentation deemed necessary by the Specifier to prove equiva-lency.

H. Manufacturer’s Material Certification: Product manufacturers shall provide certification of compliance with all applicable testing procedures and related specifications upon written request. Request for certification shall be submitted by the purchasing agency no later than the date of order placement.

I. Product manufacturers shall also have a minimum of 15 years’ experi-ence producing products for porous pavement systems.

J. Manufacturer Quality Certification: ISO Certification certifying manu-


Section 321243- 3 of 10

facturer’s quality management system for its Grasspave2 (or approved equal) system is registered to ISO 9001:2008 quality standards. Any al-ternate materials submitted shall provide a certification that their porous pavement system manufacturing process is part of an ISO program and a certification will be required specifically stating that their testing facility is certified and in accordance with ISO.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for in-

stallation.

B. Protect Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units/rolls from damage during delivery and store rolls upright, under tarp, to protect from sunlight, when time for delivery to installation exceeds one week.

C. Store Hydrogrow (or approved equal) in a dark and dry location

D. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Installer responsible for maintenance of grass plants – water/irrigation,

fertilizing, mowing, until final acceptance. DO NOT AERATE. See Grasspave2 (or approved equal) Maintenance Guide from Invisible Structures.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions within limits recommended by manu-

facturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmen-tal conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Do not begin installation of porous pavements until all hard surface pav-ing adjacent to porous pavement areas, including concrete walks, is completed.

C. Install turf when ambient air is at least 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).

D. In cold weather, do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost, and do not build on frozen base or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade.

E. Protect partially completed paving against damage from other construc-tion traffic when work is in progress.


Section 321243- 4 of 10

F. Grass coverage on the sand-filled Grasspave2 (or approved equal) rings must be completed within one week: See Part 3 Execution.

G. DO NOT DRIVE, PARK ON, or use Grasspave2 (or approved equal) system for two or three mowing cycles until grass root system has ma-tured (about 6 to 8 weeks for seeded areas). Any barricades constructed must still be accessible by emergency and fire equipment during and af-ter installation.

1.9 LIMITED WARRANTY A. Grasspave2 (or approved equal) shall warranty that its products will be

free from defects in material and/or workmanship.

B. This warranty shall be extended for a period of five (5) years following the date of shipment to the site.

C. Providing a written claim is presented to the product manufacturer within the warranty period and after inspection by the product manufacturer showing the materials have failed under this warranty, all defective ma-terials shall be refurnished under this warranty, at no charge.

D. Deleted

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Invisible Structures, Inc., which is located at:

3510 Himalaya Rd. Suite 200 ;Aurora, CO 80011; Tel: 303-233-8383; Web: www.invisiblestructures.com., or approved equal.

B. Substitutions: With approval by Owner’s Representative.

2.2 GRASSPAVE2 (or approved equal) A. Composition:

1. Manufactured in the USA. 2. High density polyethylene (HDPE): 100 percent recycled materials. 3. Color: black 4. Color Uniformity: Uniform color throughout all units rolls. 5. Carbon Black for ultraviolet light stabilization. 6. Hydrogrow (or approved equal) soil amendment and fertilizer, provided by

manufacturer with Grasspave2 (or approved equal). B. Performance Properties:

http://www.invisiblestructures.com/


Section 321243- 5 of 10

1. Maximum Loading Capability: 15,940 psi (2.29 million psf, 109,906 kPa) when filled with sand.

2. Wheelchair Access testing for ADA Compliance: Passing ASTM F 1951-08. 3. Wheelchair Access testing for ADA Compliance: Passing Rotational

Penetrometer testing. 4. Tensile strength, pull-apart testing: 458 lbf/in from ASTM D638 Modified. 5. System Permeability (Grasspave2 (or approved equal), sand, base course):

2.63 to 38.55 inches of water per hour. 6. Effective Imperviousness (E.I.): 10%.

C. Dimensions (individual units are assembled and distributed into rolls):

1. Roll area: From 108 sq ft (10 sq m) to 538 sq ft (50 sq m), in 108 sqft (10 sq m) increments.

2. Roll Widths: From 3.3 ft (1 m) to 8.2 ft (2.5 m), in 1.6 ft (0.5 m) in-crements.

3. Roll Lengths: From 32.8 ft (10m) to 65.6 ft (20 m), in 3.3 ft (1 m) increments.

4. Roll Weights: From 41 lbs (19kg) to 205 lbs (93kg), in 41 lbs (19 kg) increments.

5. Unit Nominal Width by Length: 20 inches by 20 inches (0.5 m by 0.5 m) or 40 inches by 40 inches (1 m by 1 m).

6. Nominal Depth: 1 inch (2.5 cm) – for rolls and individual units.

7. Unit Weight: 18 oz (510 g) or 5 lbs. (2.27 kg).

8. Volume Solid: 8 percent.

2.3 SYSTEM MATERIALS

A. Base Course: Sandy gravel material from local sources commonly used for road base construction (recycled materials such as crushed concrete or crushed asphalt are NOT acceptable).

1. Conforming to the following sieve analysis and requirements:

a. 100 percent passing sieve size 1 inch (25 mm).

b. 90-100 percent passing sieve size 3/4 inch (19 mm).

c. 70-80 percent passing sieve size 3/8 inch (9 mm).

d. 55-70 percent passing sieve size #4.

e. 45-55 percent passing sieve size #10.


Section 321243- 6 of 10

f. 25-35 percent passing sieve size #40.

g. 3-8 percent passing sieve size #200.

2. Provide a base course material nearly neutral in pH (range from 6.5 to 7.2) to provide adequate root zone development for turf.

3. Material may be either "pit run" or "crusher run." Avoid using clay based crusher run/pit run. Crusher run material will generally require coarse, well-draining sand conforming to AASHTO M6 or ASTM C 33 to be added to mixture (20 to 30 percent by volume) to ensure long-term porosity.

4. Alternative materials such as crushed shell, limerock, or crushed lava may be used for base course use, provided they are mixed with sharp sand (20 to 30 percent) to ensure long-term porosity, and are brought to proper compaction. Without added sand, crushed shell and limerock set up like concrete and become im-pervious.

5. Alternative size and/or composition of base course materials should be submitted to the City for approval.

B. Sand Fill for Rings and Spaces Between Rings: Clean sharp sand (washed concrete sand). Choose one of the following:

1. Coarse, well-draining sand, such as washed concrete sand con-forming to AASHTO M6 or ASTM C-33.

2. United States Golf Association (USGA) greens, section - sand mix “The Root Zone Mixture.”

C. Turf Conditioner:

1. Hydrogrow (or approved equal) a proprietary soil amendment manufactured by Invisible Structures, Inc. and provided with Grasspave2 (or approved equal).

2. Substitutions: With approval by Owner’s Representative.

D. Grass:

1. Seed: Common Bermuda. Use seed materials, of the preferred species for local environmental and projected traffic conditions, from certified sources. Seed shall be provided in containers clearly labeled to show seed name, lot number, net weight, %


Section 321243- 7 of 10

weed seed content, and guaranteed % of purity and germina-tion. Pure Live Seed types and amount shall be as shown on plans.

2. Mulch – needed only for hydroseeding: Wood or paper cellulose commercial mulch materials compatible with hydroseeding op-erations. Mulch depth according to mulch manufacturers’ rec-ommendation. DO NOT use mulch of straw, pine needles, etc., because of their low moisture holding capacity.

a. Topsoil – needed only for seeding, recommended for hy-droseeding: Obtain specified topsoil for a light “dusting” (no more than ½” or 13mm) above rings filled with sand for seed-ing germination.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrade and base course installed conditions. Do not start po-

rous paving installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Check for improperly compacted trenches, debris, and improper gradients.

B. For fire lane installations: prior to installing base course for turf pav-ing, obtain approval of local fire authorities of sub-base.

C. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. If existing conditions are found unsatisfactory, contact Architect for resolution.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation:

1. Reference City specifications.Verify subgrade in accordance with porous paving system manufacturer's instructions.

2. Proper subgrade preparation will enable the Grasspave2 (or ap-proved equal) rolls/units to connect properly and remain level and stationary after installation.

3. Excavate area allowing for unit thickness, the engineered base depth (where required), and 0.5 inch (1.25 cm) for depth of sod root zone or topsoil germination area (when applicable).

4. Provide adequate drainage from excavated area if area has po-


Section 321243- 8 of 10

tential to collect water, when working with in-place soils that have poor permeability.

5. Ensure in-place soil is relatively dry and free from standing wa-ter.

6. Uniformly grade base.

7. Level and clear base of large objects, such as rocks and pieces of wood.

B. Base Preparation:

1. Install Base per City standard specifications. Verify engineered base (if required) is installed in accordance with porous paving system manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Deleted.

3. Place a geotextile separation layer between the natural ground and the ‘engineered base’.

4. Deleted.

5. Coordinate base installation and preparation with irrigation and drip irrigation lines.

6. Place engineered base in lifts not to exceed 6 inches (150 mm), compacting each lift separately to 95 percent Modified Proctor.

7. Leave 1 inch (2.5 cm) of depth below final grade for porous paver unit and sand fill and 0.5 inch (1.25 cm) for depth of sod root zone or topsoil germination area (when applicable).

3.3 ON-SITE MANUFACTURER’S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE

A. A qualified Manufacturer’s field representative shall be available for a pre-construction meeting via phone or in person and will provide installation videos, design details, installation instructions, and the technical specifica-tions.

B. Deleted

3.4 HYDROGROW (or approved equal) INSTALLATION

A. Spread all Hydrogrow (or approved equal) mix provided (spreader rate = 4.53 kg per 100 m2 (10 lbs per 1076 ft2) evenly over the surface of the base course with a hand-held, or wheeled, rotary spreader.


Section 321243- 9 of 10

B. The Hydrogrow (or approved equal) mix should be placed immediately before in-stalling the Grasspave2 (or approved equal).

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units by placing units with rings facing up, and using snap-fit connectors, pegs and holes, provided to main-tain proper spacing and interlock the units. Units can be easily shaped with pruning shears or knife. Units placed on curves, slopes, and high traffic are-as shall be anchored to the base course, using 40d common nails with fend-er washer, as required to secure units in place. Tops of rings shall be be-tween 6 mm to 13 mm (0.25" to 0.5") below the surface of adjacent hard-surface pavements.

B. Install sand in rings as they are laid in sections by "back-dumping" direct-ly from a dump truck, or from buckets mounted on tractors, which then exit the site by driving over rings already filled with sand. The sand is then spread laterally from the pile using flat bottomed shovels and/or wide "asphalt rakes" to fill the rings. A stiff bristled broom should be used for final "finishing" of the sand. The sand must be "compacted" by using wa-ter from hose, irrigation heads, or rainfall, with the finish grade no less than the top of rings and no more than 6 mm (0.25") above top of rings.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF GRASS

A. Grass coverage on the sand-filled rings must be completed within one week. Sand must be re-installed and leveled and Grasspave2 (or approved equal) checked for integrity if rings become exposed due to wind, rain, traffic, or other factors. (Choose one paragraph below to meet grass in-stallation method desired.)

1. Preferred method: Hydroseeding/hydro-mulching - A combina-

tion of water, seed and fertilizer are homogeneously mixed in a purpose-built, truck-mounted tank. The seed mixture is sprayed onto the site at rates shown on plans and per hydroseeding man-ufacturer's recommendations. Coverage must be uniform and complete. Following germination of the seed, areas lacking germination larger than 20 cm x 20 cm (8" x 8") must be re-seeded immediately. Seeded areas must be fertilized and kept moist during development of the turf plants. DO NOT DRIVE ON SYSTEM: Hydroseeded/hydro-mulch areas must be pro-


Section 321243- 10 of 10

tected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a pe-riod of 6 to 8 weeks, or until the root system has penetrated and established well below the Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units.

2. Install grass seed at rates per grass type. A light "dusting" of commercial topsoil mix, not to exceed 1/2" (25 mm) will be placed above the rings and seed mix to aid germination rates. Seeded areas must be fertilized and kept moist during develop-ment of the turf plants). DO NOT DRIVE ON SYSTEM: Seed-ed areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergen-cy vehicles, for a period of 6 to 8 weeks, or until the root system has penetrated and established well below the Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units.

B. Adequately water grass seed to assure germination of seed and growth of root system.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Seeded areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergency

vehicles, for a period of 4 to 8 weeks, or until the grass is mature to han-dle traffic.


A. Remove and replace segments of Grasspave2 (or approved equal) units

where three or more adjacent rings are broken or damaged, reinstalling as specified, so no evidence of replacement is apparent.

B. Perform cleaning during the installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove all excess materials, debris, and equipment from site. Repair any damage to adjacent materials and surfaces resulting from installation of this work.

3.9 Deleted

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 1321

BOLLARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Metal bollards.2. Mounting hardware.

B. Related Requirements:1. None.


A. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

B. ASTM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01430 – Submittal.

B. Product Data: Provide for each type of bollard, component, finish, and accessoryspecified.

C. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard colors for selection. Submit sample ofcolor specified.

D. Setting Drawings: Show embedded items and cutouts required for work specified inother Sections.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s field touch-up, cleaning, and maintenanceinstructions.

F. Warranty Documentation: Submit sample of manufacturer’s warranty.


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect bollards and accessories during delivery, storage, and handling.

SECTION 321321 BOLLARDS


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in materials andworkmanship.Warranty Period: Five years from date of invoice, except as otherwise indicated.1. Coatings: Two years, against peeling, cracking, or significant color change.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd., phone 604-592-4333 or 888-735-5680, fax 604-590-8875, website www.reliance-foundry.com, email [email protected] or approved equal.

2.2 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Bollard:1. Model: Reliance Foundry; R-7902.2. Size: 36 inches high x 4 3/8 inches diameter.3. Design: Cylindrical with rounded top.

B. Material:1. Steel: ASTM A36; 25 percent recycled-material content.2. Type: Polyester powder coat over epoxy primer.3. Color: Yellow.

C. Installation:1. Fixed, New Concrete, Embedded.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Reflective Stripe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine paving or other substrates for compliance with manufacturer’s requirementsfor placement and location of embedded items, condition of substrate, and otherconditions affecting installation of bollards.


http://www.reliance-foundry.com/



SECTION 321321 BOLLARDS


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and setting drawings.

B. Damaged, cracked, chipped, deformed or marred bollards are not acceptable. Field touch-up minor imperfections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 CLEANING & PROTECTION

A. Protect bollards against damage.

B. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, clean bollards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other foreign materials.

C. Touch up damaged finishes according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Provide executed warranty.

END OF SECTION

Section 321800 - 1 of 2

SECTION 32 1800

ATHLETIC AND RECREATIONAL SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes placement and compacting of infield surfacing for softball fields andsupplementary items required for installation.

B. All infield areas and bullpens shall be constructed of Diamond Pro materials orapproved equal. Alternate submittals shall include a one pound sample of material withdetailed specifications of the product and manufacturer as well as five productreferences of installed applications.

1.2 DELIVERY

A. Deliver infield mix and infield conditioner in truck beds that have been completelycleaned of gravel or other foreign materials. Reject materials that contain foreignmaterials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT STANDARD

A. The Contract Documents are based on the following product to establish a standard ofquality.

1. Manufacturer: Diamond Pro®, a subsidiary of TXI. (1-800-228-2987)

2. Products:a. Infield Surfacing:

1) Diamond Pro® Red Infield Conditioner: A proprietary infield conditionermade from special raw clay then heated in a rotary kiln to produce avitreous material.

b. Home Plate and Pitching Rubber Clay Bricks:

1) Diamond Pro® Home Plate / Infield Clay: A screened clay loam with arich red color.

2) Diamond Pro® Clay Bricks: Unfired, compressed clay bricks.

SECTION 321800 ATHLETIC AND RECREATIONAL SURFACING

Section 321800 - 2 of 2

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive infield surfacing and associated work andconditions under which work will be installed. Do not proceed with work untilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to LandscapeArchitect.

3.2 INSTALLATION - INFIELD SURFACING

A. General: Provide a 5-inch total thickness of infield surfacing consisting of 4-inches ofcompacted Infield mix and 1-inch total Infield Conditioner, finely graded to theelevations and contours indicated on the Drawings.

B. Sub-grade: Excavate to a minimum depth of 5-inches to receive the infield surfacing.

C. Placement: Spread Diamond Pro® Infield Mix evenly over the entire excavated infieldsurface in one layer to a depth of 4-inches and compact. Spread Diamond Pro® RedInfield Conditioner over the Infield Mix to a depth of ¾-inch, then roto-till to a depth ofapproximately 3-inches. Level and roll-pack entire infield surfacing. Add a ¼-inchlayer of Red Infield Conditioner as a top dressing and screen-drag for a level-playingsurface.

D. Compaction: Compact the Infield Surfacing to between ninety percent and ninety-fivepercent of maximum density (standard proctor) by rolling with a small one-ton roller.

E. Fine grading: Fine-grading of the infield surfacing shall be true to line, grade and crosssection. When tested with a 12-foot straight edge, it shall have no deviation from theface of the straight edge in excess of ¼-inch at any point. Correct all points of thesurface not meeting these requirements.

END OF SECTION

Section 323000 - 1 of 5

SECTION 32 3000

MISCELANEOUS ATHLETIC AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contractor to provide products, materials, labor and services necessary to complete installation of all site furnishings and related work indicated on the Drawings or specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Trash Receptacle 2. Dugout Bench with Top Shelf 3. Bases 4. Home Plates 5. Pitcher’s Rubber 6. Windscreen 7. Field Sign Distance Markers 8. Bench 9. Foul Pole 10. Temporary Fence 11. Backstop Wall Pad


A. Installer Qualification: An experienced installer who has completed installation of site furnishings and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Naming of manufactured products is not intended to restrict use of equal products by other manufacturers. Proposed substitutions should be submitted to Owner's Representative for approval, prior to bid.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 323000 MISCELANEOUS ATHLETIC AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS

Section 323000 - 2 of 7

A. Contractor to verify quantities with Owner’s Representative prior to purchasing.

B. Product Data: Include physical characteristics such as shape, dimensions and finish for each bench.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide installation details for each product.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following product, show the color of the finishes.

E. Maintenance Data: For each product, provide recommended methods for repairing damage and abrasions to the powder coat finish.

F. Contactor to verify field distance and get ownership approval prior to ordering distance marker signs.


A. Damaged merchandise is not acceptable.

B. Take all means to protect materials and related equipment before, during and after installation and to protect the materials and work of other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Remove all debris daily, leaving storage and work areas in organized fashion and as neat as practical.

D. Store products in original undamaged packaging in a dry location until ready for installation

E. Handle powder coated products with carefully to prevent any damage to the finish.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRASH RECEPTACLE

A. 32-gallon, 30" high x 24" diameter. Include 32 Gallon Liner. Color to be selected by the Owners Representative from full range of manufacturer’s standard options.

B. Equal to specified product.


Section 323000 - 3 of 7

1. Manufacturer: Dumor 2. Model: 432-32 W/CVR-30-FTO – 32 Gallon 3. Color: To Be Selected by Owner’s Representative 4. Finish: Vertical Metal Slats (S), Powder Coated 5. Mounting: Surface Mounted Per Manufacturer’s Requirements

2.2 DUGOUT BENCH WITH TOPSHELF

A. Aluminum 6063-T6 alloy metal bench with 204R1 anodized finished seat plank, 37” deep, 10” wide bench 18” deep top shelf and 21’ long. Seat plank has a ribbed, non-slip surface, with a minimum .078" wall thickness. Mill finished aluminum, 6061-T6 alloy with all joints MIG welded understructure. Seat Plank (and Back Rest) Finish: 204R1 Anodized. Fitted aluminum for all channel end caps. Warranty: 5-year Material Defects and Work (25-year Finish).

B. Equal to specified product. 1. Manufacture: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: PBS-21 3. Finish: Aluminum 6063-T6 Alloy, With 204R1 Anodized Finish Seat Plank 4. Mounting: Per Manufacture’s Requirements

2.3 BASES

A. Bases (3), Anchors (3), Inground Sleeves (3), And Plugs (3) Per Each Field.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: Schutt Hollywood Impact 2. Model: A33-283 3. Finish: Softball/Baseball Base, 15"X 15"X 2-1/2", Set Of Three Bases Per Field,

Includes 6" Stanchion. Anchor To Be Included And Is To Be Purchased Separately.

4. Mounting: Per Manufacture’s Requirements

2.4 HOME PLATE

A. In Ground Plates, One Piece, 3” High with Solid Rubber Core, Beveled Edges, And Wood Backing.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: BHPWD, Bury All Professional Wood Filled Home Plate 3. Finish: Molded Rubber 4. Mounting: Per Manufacture’s Requirements


Section 323000 - 4 of 7

2.5 PITCHER’S RUBBER

A. Spike Down Pitcher’s Rubber with Three Spikes.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: BIGPP 3. Finish: Molded Rubber 4. Sizes: Official – 6”x24” 5. Mounting: Per Manufacture’s Requirements

2.6 WINDSCREEN

A. Knitted polyethylene, heavy duty 9 oz. material, with 78% opacity, double stitched

perimeter 3 ply hem with 18 oz. vinyl reinforcement, and gromets spaced every 12 inches. Warranty: limited 7 years.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacturer: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: Extreme Duty Windscreen, CWSBE 3. Color: To Be Selected by Owner’s Representative 4. Mounting: Per Manufacture’s Requirements 5. Accessories: BC40, Black Cable Ties

2.7 FIELD DISTANCE MARKERS

A. Heavy-duty metal, 3 mm thick, predrilled holes for hanging, and hanging hardware.

B. Equal to Specified Product 1. Manufacturer: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: Horizontal Distance Markers – Metal, OFM 3. Finish: 3mm thick metal 4. Background Color: To Be Selected by Owner’s Representative 5. Font Type, Size, Color: To be Selected by Owner’s Representative 6. Contactor to verify field distance and get ownership approval prior to ordering

signs. 7. Mounting: Per Manufacture’s Requirements

2.8 BENCH

A. Commercial-grade materials, at least 25% recycled raw steel, 100% recyclable steel; 1/8” x 1-1/2” square tubing legs and 1-1/2” OD 11-gauge tubing frame with 1/8” x 1” x 3” rectangular tubing inset seat.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: Keystone Ridge Design


Section 323000 - 5 of 7

2. Model: Penn Flat Bench 3. Finish: Commercial Grade Steel, Polyester Powder Coating 4. Sizes: 17–1/8”Hx48"Lx2'-12.5"W 5. Color: Keysheild® Polyester Powder Coating, Color to be approved by owner’s

representative. 6. Mounting: surface mount, Per Manufacture’s Requirements

2.9 FOUL POLE

A. Commercial-grade materials, aluminum pipe, powder coated finish with ground sleeve mounting. Wing consist of 1/8” stamped aluminum sheets with double reinforced bends.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: Sportsfield Specialties, Inc. 2. Model: FPW420 - 20’ Foul Pole 3. Components:

a. Foul Pole Upright: 1. 4” Aluminum Tube (4” O.D. x 1/8” Wall) 2. 20’ Height Above Finish Grade 3. Super Durable Powder Coated Finish

i. Color: Yellow b. Foul Pole Wing:

1. Stamped 1/8” (0.125”) Aluminum Sheet with Double Reinforced Bends Welded at Corners

2. 1.5” Square Open Mesh 3. 18”W x 12’L

i. Top of Upright Pole to 8’ Above Finish Grade c. Ground Sleeve:

1. 2-6” Depth 2. Aluminum Construction 3. Alignment Bolt 4. Welded Leveling Plate

d. Stainless Steel Assembly Hardware

C. Installation of Equipment 1. All Foul Pole Equipment and Accessories shall be installed as recommended per

manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on the drawings. 2. Contractor to Provide signed and sealed shop drawings. Concrete anchoring

foundations to be determined by contractor’s structural engineer based on local soil conditions and building codes.

3. Installer should have a minimum of five (5) baseball/softball equipment installations or similar experience in the previous three (3) years.

2.10 TEMPORARY FENCE


Section 323000 - 6 of 7

A. Grand Slam 300' HR Fence Kit with one piece fencing, top strip HR marker and mounting poles. One (1) temporary fence package per field.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: 300F10k 3. Components:

a. Fence: 1. 4’ Height 2. 471’ Long 3. 3” Yellow Top Strip Home Run Marker 4. Color: To Be Selected by Owner’s Representative

b. End Poles: 1. (2) Rigid Poles

c. Flexible Poles: 1. (49) Flexible Poles (10' Intervals) 2. (97) Flexible Poles ( 5' Intervals)

d. Tape Measure e. Auger Digging Tool

C. Installation of Equipment 1. Auger Digging Tool

2.11 BACKSTOP WALL PAD

A. Heavy-duty vinyl cover, foam pad and mounting gromets.

B. Equal to Specified Product. 1. Manufacture: PYT Sports. www.pytsports.net 2. Model: Field Wall Pad, Soft Shell – GWP2 3. Components:

a. Cover: 1. Material: 18 Once Vinyl 2. Color: To Be Selected by Owner’s Representative

b. Foam Pad: 1. Thickness – 2”

c. Mounting Hardware 1. 2” Gromet Strips 2. Masonry Screw 3. Washer to Be Sized to Cover Gromet 4. Color: To Match Backstop Wall Pad

C. Installation of Equipment 1. Backstop wall pad to attached at bottom and top of wall below wall cap. 2. Gromets to be secured to wall with masonry screws and washers.


Section 323000 - 7 of 7

3. Washer to sized to cover gromets. 4. Masonry screws and washers color to match backstop wall pad.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Handle and install athletic and site improvements according to manufacturer’s recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Some assembly may be required.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

E. Install athletic and site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Section 323113 - 1 of 7

SECTION 32 3113

CHAINLINK FENCE AND NET BACKSTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes chain-link fences and swing gates, and net backstops.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, and backstops, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7: 1. Minimum Post Size: Determine according to ASTM F 1043 for framework and

post spacing indicated. 2. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to

CLFMI WLG 2445, based on mesh size and pattern specified and, on the following, but in no case, provide materials of lesser dimension than those indicated on drawings or specified:

a. Wind Loads: as indicated in the referenced building code for this project and locale.

b. Exposure Category: C.

c. Fence Height: as indicated in drawings or as specified.

d. Material Group: IA, ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe or IC, electric-resistance-welded round steel pipe.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work. C. First paragraph below assumes manufacturer's standard-size Samples are acceptable.

Revise to suit Project.

SECTION 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND BACKSTOPS

Section 323113 - 2 of 7

D. First paragraph below is defined in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" as a "Delegated-Design Submittal." Retain if Work of this Section is required to withstand specific design loads and design responsibilities have been delegated to Contractor or if structural data are required as another way to verify compliance with performance requirements. Professional engineer qualifications are specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For chain-link fences and gate framework indicated, and for sports field net backstops to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Oklahoma registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Remaining paragraphs are defined in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" as "Informational Submittals."

G. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate, and for net backstops from manufacturer.

H. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.

I. Operation and maintenance data.

J. Sample of special warranty.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates and net backstops that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below:

1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Steel Wire Fabric Fencing, as indicated on Drawings: Wire with a diameter of .203 inch ( 9-gauge at fencing).


Section 323113 - 3 of 7

a. Mesh Size: 2 inches

b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq. ft. with galvanized coating applied before weaving.

c. Fabric shall have knuckled selvage top and bottom.

3. Alternate Bid: Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) color coated steel chain link fabric per ASTM F668 Class 1, extruded over metallic coated steel wire.

4. Size and Height: Chain link fabric two (2 “) inch mesh, nine (9 ga.) gauge, 0.148” diameter steel core wire having a break load of 1290 lbf.

5. Color of chain link fabric shall be black. 2.2 ALTERNATE BID: PVC COLOR COATED STEEL FENCE FRAMEWORK A. Steel pipe Type I: ASTM F1043 Group IA, ASTM F1083 standard weight schedule

40 hot-dip galvanized pipe having a galvanized coating of 1.8 oz/ft² on the outside and 1.8 oz/ft² on the inside surface. Exterior of pipe to have F1043 PVC thermally fused color coating, minimum thickness 10 mils. Minimum steel yield strength of 30,000 psi.

B. All Posts: 4 inches and 6 inches, 0.226” wall thickness, weight 9.1 lbs/ft. C. Rails: 1 -5/8 inches OD, 0.140” wall thickness, weight 2.27 lbs/ft.

D. Color: All rails and posts shall be black. E. Touch up any nicks or scratches of the PVC color coating with liquid PVC paint.

2.2 FENCE FRAMING

A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts and fitted caps. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based on the following:

1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Light Industrial Strength: Material Group IC-L, round steel pipe, electric-resistance-welded pipe.

a. Line Post: 4 inches in diameter.

b. End, Corner and Post: 4.0 inches and 6 inches in diameter.

3. Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate, top, and bottom rails complying with ASTM F 1043.


Section 323113 - 4 of 7

4. Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043.

5. Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:

a. Type A galvanized coating.

b. Coatings: Any coating above.

2.3 SWING GATES A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single and double swing gate

types. 1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated. 2. Gate Fabric Height: As indicated

B. Pipe and Tubing:

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to match fence framing.

2. Gate Posts: 4 inches and 6 inches in diameter Round tubular steel.

3. Gate Frames and Bracing: 1 – 7/8 inches in diameter, round tubular steel. C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded. D. Hardware:

1. Hinges: 180-degree outward swing.

2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate.

3. Padlock and Chain: Owner furnished.

2.4 FITTINGS A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.

2.5 WIND SCREEN HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE SHADING FABRIC A. Material: UV Stabilized Shadesure fabric by PTY Sports or approved equal.

Manufacture to meet tensile structural applications. Manufacture with monofilament and tape filler of 195g per square meter weight and burst strength of 260 kpa. Meet ASTM E 84-91a Class A fire resistance. Provide tamper resistant cable and fittings system for attachment. Locate where indicated on drawings.

B. Color: To be selected by Owner’s representative. C. See plans and detail elevations for location and extent of windscreen.


Section 323113 - 5 of 7

2.6 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

2.7 PLASTIC LOCKING SLATS

A. 1-7/8 inches Wide. entwined through chain link mesh. See plan for location.

B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) with ultra violet (UV) inhibitors.

C. Color: Black

2.8 SAFETY TOP CAP: POLY-CAP: A. Material: Poly Cap: Hoover Fence Co.; Item No: Poly-Cap, hooverfence.com, Tel:

(330) 358-2335, or approved equal. B. Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter. C. Color: To be determined by owner. D. 18” UV resistant reusable ties, color to match Poly-Cap, secure per manufactures

directions. E. Poly Cap applied to 6 feet tall outfield fences only. See plan for location.

2.9 BACKSTOP NETTING A. Material: Twisted Knotted Nylon Netting Backstop Netting: Burbank Sports Custom

Backstop Netting, Jacksonville, Fl., Tel: (866) 349 – 0057 or approved equal. B. Size: Refer to plans for conditions. C. Color: Black D. Hardware: Contractor to provide all hardware necessary to install and anchor netting.

Refer to plans. E. Contractor to submit shop drawings for approval.


Section 323113 - 6 of 7

EXECUTION

2.10 INSTALLATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise

permitted by Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Indicate locations of

utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

D. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.

E. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.

F. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below grade to allow covering with surface material.

G. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more.

H. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 120 inches o.c., unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

I. Horizontal Rails: Provide top and bottom rails at fence assemblies. Provide top, bottom and intermediate rails at fence assemblies of 8 feet and greater height. Where bottom rails are placed above concrete walkways, anchor rails at mid-point between posts.

J. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to field side of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated.

K. Polyethylene Shading Fabric: Install in locations indicated, securely anchored in place.

L. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware


Section 323113 - 7 of 7

using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

M. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

END OF SECTION

Section 329300 - 1 of 6

SECTION 32 3119

DECORATIVE METAL FENCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the welded ornamental steel fence system defined herein at I-240 Sports Complex Reno.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 02220 - Earthwork

B. Section 03300 - Concrete


A. The manufacturer shall supply a total fence system of Montage II® Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel Genesis™ design. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) required.


B. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

C. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.

D. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.

SECTION 323119 DECORATIVE METAL FENCE

Section 329300 - 2 of 6

E. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.

F. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

G. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

H. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

I. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

J. ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets.

1.6 SUBMITTAL

A. The manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted prior to installation.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft.

1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping, blistering or corroding.

B. Reimbursement for labor necessary to restore or replace components that have been found to be defective under the terms of manufactures warranty shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from date of original purchase.


Section 329300 - 3 of 6

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. The fence system shall conform to Montage II® Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel Genesis™ design, extended picket bottom rail treatment, 2-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma, or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIAL

A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276 g/m2), Coating Designation G-90.

B. Material for pickets shall be 1” square x 14 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.75” x 1. 75” x .105”. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced 4.715” o.c. Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets.

B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket-to-rail intersection by Ameristar’s proprietary fusion welding process, thus completing the rigid panel assembly (Note: The process produces a virtually seamless, spatter-free good-neighbor appearance, equally attractive from either side of the panel).

C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrodeposition coating (E-Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash, followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be Black. The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality


Section 329300 - 4 of 6

characteristic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating performance criteria of ASTM F2408).

D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and infill performance requirements for Industrial weight fences under ASTM F2408.

E. Swing gates shall be fabricated using 1.75” x 14ga Forerunner double channel rail, 2” sq. x 12ga. gate ends, and 1” sq. x 14ga. pickets. Gates that exceed 6’ in width will have a 1.75” sq. x 14ga. intermediate upright. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding. Gusset plates will be welded at each upright to rail intersection. Cable kits will be provided for additional trussing for all gates leaves over 6’.

F. Pedestrian swing gates shall be self-closing, having a gate leaf no larger than 48” width. Integrated hinge-closer set (2 qty) shall be ADA compliant that shall include a variable speed and final snap adjustment with compact design (no greater than 5” x 6” footprint). Hinge-closer set (2 qty) shall be tested to a minimum of 500,000 cycles and capable of self-closing gates up to a maximum gate weight of 260 lbs. and maximum weight load capacity of 1,500 lbs. Hinge-closer device shall be externally mounted with tamper-resistant security fasteners, with full range of adjustability, horizontal (.5” - 1.375”) and vertical (0 - .5”). Maintenance free hinge-closer set shall be tested to operate in temperatures of negative 20 F to 200 F degrees, and swings to negative 2 degrees to ensure reliable final lock engagement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans.

3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus ½”. For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and


Section 329300 - 5 of 6

“Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application.

3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE

A. When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1) Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2) Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3) Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures’ warranty.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’ gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING

A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts.

Table 1 – Minimum Sizes for Montage II Posts

Fence Posts Panel Height 2-1/2” x 12 Ga. Up to & Including 6’ Height 3” x 12 Ga. Over 6’ Up to & Including 8’ Height

Gate Leaf Gate Height

Up to & Including 4’ Over 4’ Up to & In-cluding 6’

Over 6’ Up to & In-cluding 8’

Up to 4’ 2-1/2” x 12 Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4’1” to 6’ 3” x 12Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6’1” to 8’ 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 8’1” to 10’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 10’1” to 12’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16”


Section 329300 - 6 of 6

12’1” to 14’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 14’1” to 16’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16”

Table 2 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Character-istics

ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements

Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Re-sistance

B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward im-pact using 0.625” ball).

Weathering Re-sistance

D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method)

Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).

Table 3 – Montage II – Post Spacing By Bracket Type Span For INVINCIBLE®

8’ Nominal (91-1/2” Rail) For CLASSIC, GENESIS, & MAJESTIC 8’ Nominal (92-5/8” Rail)

Post Size

2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2”

3” 2-1/2”

3” 2-1/2” 3”

Bracket Type

Industrial Flat Mount (BB301)*

Industrial Line

2-1/2” (BB319) 3” (BB320)

Industrial Universal

2.5” (BB302) 3” (BB303)

Industrial Flat Mount (BB301)

Industrial Swivel

(BB304)*

Post Settings ± ½” O.C.

94-1/2” 95” 94-

1/2” 95” 96” 96-1/2” 96” 96-1/2” *96” *96-1/2”

*Note: When using BB304 swivel brackets on either or both ends of a panel installation, care must be taken to ensure the spacing between post and adjoining pickets meets applicable codes. This will require trimming one or both ends of the panel. When using the BB301 flat mount bracket for Invincible style, rail may need to be drilled to accommodate rail to bracket attachment.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 324800 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION


SECTION 32 4800

LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Furnish all work and materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with the installation of underground irrigation system complete, as shown on drawings and/or specified herein. When the term "Contractor" is used in this section, it shall refer to the Irrigation Subcontractor.


A. ASTM International (Formerly known as American Society for Testing and Materials) (ASTM):

1. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

2. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

3. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

4. STM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings or manufacturer's "cut sheet" for each type of sprinkler head, pipe, controller, valves, check valve assemblies, valve boxes, wire, conduit, fittings, and all other types of fixtures and equipment which he proposes to install. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, equipment capacity, and manufacturer's installation recommendation, if applicable, for each proposed item.

B. No partial submittal will be accepted, and submittals shall be neatly bound into a binder and logically organized. After the submittal has been approved, substitutions will not be allowed except by written consent of the Owner's Representative.

C. Record Drawings:

1. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the following:

a. Point of connection.

b. Irrigation pressure pipe routing (provide dimensions for each 100 linear feet (maximum) along each routing, and for each change in directions).



c. Gate valves.

d. Irrigation control valves.

e. Control wire routing.

f. Other related items as may be directed by the Owner's Representative.

2. Locate all dimensions from two permanent points (buildings, monuments, sidewalks, curbs, or pavements).

3. Record all changes, which are made from the Contract drawings, including changes in the pressure and non-pressure pipes.

4. Record all required information on a set of prints of the Contract drawings. Do not use these prints for any other purpose.

5. Maintain information daily. Keep Contract drawings at the Worksite at all times and available for review by the Owner's Representative.

6. When record drawings have been approved by the Owner's Representative, transfer all information to a set of reproducible mylars using permanent ink, or AutoCAD 2018 Files. Changes using ball-point pen are not acceptable. Make dimensions accurately at the same scale used on original Drawings, or larger. If photo reduction is required to facilitate controller chart housing, notes or dimension must be a minimum 1/4 inch in height.

D. Controller Charts:

1. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been approved by the Owner's Representative.

2. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed.

a. Chart may be a reproduction of the record drawing, if the scale permits fitting it into the controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility.

b. Chart shall be a print of the actual system, showing the area covered by that controller.

3. Identify the area of coverage of each remote-control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color, drawn over the entire area of coverage.

4. Following approval of charts by the Owner's Representative, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20-millimeter-thick plastic sheet.

5. Charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of the irrigation system.

E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals:



1. Provide one (1) individual bound manual detailing operating and maintenance requirements for irrigation systems.

2. Manuals shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative no later than 10 days prior to final acceptance of work.

3. Provide descriptions of all installed materials and systems in sufficient detail to permit maintenance personnel to understand, operate, and maintain the equipment.

4. Provide the following in each manual:

a. Index sheet, stating Irrigation Contractor's name, address, telephone number, and name of person to contact.

b. Duration of guarantee period.

c. Equipment list providing the following for each item:

1. Manufacturer's name.

2. Make and model number.

3. Name and address of local manufacturer's representative.

4. Spare parts list in detail.

5. Detailed operating and maintenance instructions of major equipment.

6. Pressure pipe tests: by whom and date.

7. Written guarantee: received by and date.

1.4 CODES/PERMITS

A. All work under this section shall comply with the provisions of these Specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Owner's Representative and shall satisfy all applicable local codes, ordinances, or regulations of the governing bodies and all authorities having jurisdiction over this Project.

B. Installation of equipment and materials shall be done in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code, Plumbing code of jurisdictional city, and standard plumbing procedures. The drawings and these Specifications are intended to comply with all the necessary rules and regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner's Representative in writing of the discrepancies and apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with the regulations shall be paid for as covered by these Contract documents.

C. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, and pay all costs in connection with his work; file with all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver these to the Owner's Representative.



D. The Contractor shall include in the work all labor, materials, services, apparatus, or drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations whether or not shown on the drawings and/or specified.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to the City of Oklahoma City code for piping and component requirements.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from the City of Oklahoma City indicating approval of products in system.

C. All hard wiring shall be performed by a licensed electrician.

D. All work shall be verified by a firm or individual duly certified by the Irrigation Association as a Certified Landscape Irrigation Auditor.

1.6 EXISTING UTILITIES - LOCATION AND ELEVATIONS

A. Locations and elevations of various utilities included with the scope of this work have been obtained from the most reliable sources available and should serve as a general guide without guarantee to accuracy. The Contractor shall examine the site and verify to his own satisfaction the locations and elevation of all utilities and availability of utilities and services required. The Contractor shall inform himself as to their relation to the work and the submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence thereof. The Contractor shall repair at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, for damage to any utility shown on the plans.

B. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative for instructions as to further action.

C. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect to existing stub-outs, should such stub- outs not be located exactly as shown and as may be required to work around existing work, this shall be done at no increase in cost to the Authority. All such work will be recorded on record drawings and turned over to the Owner's Representative prior to final acceptance.

1.7 SLEEVES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS

A. Sleeves and electrical conduits shall be coordinated with paving contractor prior to construction and as noted on the drawings. Contractors shall be responsible for locating all sleeves and conduits at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.8 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall warranty material and workmanship for (2) two years from final acceptance including repair and replacement of defective materials, workmanship, and repair of backfill settlement.

B. Maintenance during warranty shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:



1. Adjustment of sprinkler height and plumb to compensate for settlement and/or plant growth.

2. Backfilling of all trenches.

3. Adjustment of head coverage (arc of spray) as necessary.

4. Unstopping heads plugged by foreign material.

5. Adjustment of controller as necessary to insure proper sequence and watering time.

6. All maintenance necessary to keep the system in good operating order. Repair of damage caused by vandals, other contractors or weather conditions shall be considered extra to these specifications.

C. Warranty and maintenance final acceptance does not include alterations as necessitated by re-landscaping, re-grading, addition of trees or the addition, and/or changes in sidewalks, walls, drives, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all materials shall be new and unused. The irrigation equipment catalog numbers used for reference in these Specifications are to establish minimum quality standards and may be substituted with an "approved equal" as outlined in Paragraph 1.5 of this section.

2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC PIPE)

A. PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standards noted herein.

B. Marking and Identification: PVC pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with following information: Manufacturer's name, size, type of pipe, and material, SDR number, Product Standard number, and the NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal.

C. PVC pipe fittings: Shall be of the same material as the PVC pipe specified and compatible with PVC pipe furnished. Solvent weld type shall be Schedule 40.

D. PVC Pipe: Shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld, SDR-21, PS 22-70 for all sizes 3/4 inch to 2 inches. All 1/2-inch pipe shall be solvent weld SDR- 13.5, Class 315.

E. Flexible Connectors: All flexible connections to rigid PVC shall be manufactured by F.P. Parker Mfg. Inc. under the name of Cobra Connector. Flexible nipples shall be factory assembled only.

F. Pipe sleeves: Shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld, SDR-21, PSD 22-70 for all sizes.

2.3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE (HDPE PIPE)



A. HDPE pipe manufactured from high density, extra high molecular weight compound equaling a PE 3408 designation and shall conform to ASTM-1247 and ASTM-3350; with a cell classification of 345434C.

B. Marking and Identification: HDPE pipe shall be black in color with a continuous BLUE color code stripe to identify the pipe as ‘Irrigation’

C. HDPE pipe fittings: Shall be of the same material and specifications as the HDPE pipe specified.

D. HDPE pipe joints: Joints between plain ends of polyethylene pipe shall be made by butt fusion when possible. The Pipe Manufacturer’s fusion procedures shall be followed at all times as well as the recommendations of the Fusion Machine Manufacturer. The wall thicknesses of the adjoining pipes shall have the same DR at the point of fusion.

E. Saddle connections: Shall be fusion welded per the Manufacturer’s recommended saddle fusion procedures.

F. Mechanical fittings: If used (which are designed for, or tested and found acceptable for use with polyethylene pipe) are utilized for transitions between pipe materials, repairs, joining pipe sections, saddle connections, or at other locations, the recommendation of the Mechanical Fitting Manufacturer must be followed. These procedures may differ from other pipe materials.

G. Socket and Saddle fusions: Shall be tested by a bent strap test as described by the Pipe Manufacturer. The pipe Manufacturer shall provide visual guidelines for inspecting the butt, saddle, and socket fusion joints.

H. Pressure Testing: Pressure testing shall be conducted in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommended procedure. Pressure testing shall use water as the test media. Pneumatic (air) testing is prohibited.

2.4 WIRE AND SPLICES

A. All wire shall be Maxi Wire, 2.5mm2, 12 or 14 AWG, Dual conductor-solid core, Double insulation irrigation control wire.

B. Wire splices shall be 3M DBR/Y splice kits for all connections along the 2-Wire path.

C. All connectors shall be UL listed, rated 600 volt, for PVC insulated wire. No wire splices shall be buried.

D. Rainbird IVM-SD lighting surge protectors shall be installed at maximum distances of 500 feet or at a rate of 15 field devices.

2.5 MANUAL VALVES

A. Manual valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be all brass, globe type with composition disc rated at 150 pounds W.O.G. All valves 2" and smaller shall be PVC, manufactured by Spears.



B. All valves shall have brass cross handles.

2.6 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

A. Electric remote control valves shall have plastic bodies and covers and shall be globe-type diaphragm valves of normally closed design.

B. Operation shall be accomplished by means of IVM-SOL decoder/solenoids. All solenoids shall be labeled with a 2-Wire Device barcode.

C. A flow stem adjustment handle shall be included on each valve.

2.7 QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Quick coupling valves shall be composed of a brass body with a weighted metal cover.

B. The valve shall accept a single lug 1-inch bronze valve key for operation.

C. Provide one (1) coupler and one (1) hose swivel ell for each quick coupling valve shown on the plans.

D. Valves are to be installed as shown in the details. Units to be isolated from main pressure pipe with a ball valve as noted in the detail.

2.8 VALVE BOXES

A. Plastic valve boxes shall be made of high-strength injection molded high density polypropylene or polyolefin plastic suitable for shrub bed irrigation purposes.

B. Boxes shall be suitable in size and configuration for the operability and adjustment of the valve.

C. Manufactured extension sections will be used as appropriate to the depth of piping.

D. All plastic valve box covers shall bolt down or have locking mechanisms and shall be colored green or black as selected by the Owner's Representative.

2.9 SWING JOINTS

A. PVC swing joints shall be pressure rated at 315 PSI and be Sch. 80 PVC rated units. The unitized assembly shall have NPT threads on both the inlet and outlet fittings.

2.10 ROTARY HEADS

A. The sprinkler shall be gear driven, closed case rotary type unit having the following minimum characteristics. It shall have radius adjustment capabilities by means of a stainless-steel nozzle retainer/radius adjustment screw or have the ability to be adjusted by a top-mounted single adjustment screw which changes the discharging nozzle and angle of throw.

B. The sprinkler shall be available in both full and part circle configurations. The adjustable part shall be adjustable from a minimum of 40 degrees to 330 degrees. The



units shall have a minimum of a 4- inch rise and be equipped with an internal drain check valve to prevent low-head drainage and be capable of holding back water up to a 10-foot rise.

C. The unit shall have a rubber cover attached to the top of the riser. When specified, the unit shall have a cover molded in purple rubber to indicate the use of reclaimed water. Each unit shall have NPT female threads and be either 1" or 3/4" in diameter. The unit shall be serviceable after installation from the top and each unit shall have a filter screen installed. There must be a stainless-steel spring from positive retraction of the riser upon completion of a cycle. Each unit shall be attached to a lateral pipe by means of a swing joint.

D. The unit shall carry a full 2-year exchange warranty from the date of installation.

2.11 CONTROLLER

E. Rain Bird Systems, LX-IVM Pro 2-Wire Controller: 240 Station capacity. Metal Cabinet.

2.11 BOOSTER PUMP

A. Rain Bird Systems, ACLP SERIES, irrigation booster pump station, (1) 10 horsepower pump providing 150 GPM supply at 50 PSI (Boost), for a total output of 150 GPM at 50 PSI at pump discharge. Pump model number: ACLP10LAC6 – 5BF1L9C0/1 – 3x480 three phase power. Contact Laremy Kamas with Rain Bird Corporation at 6991 E Southpoint Rd, Tucson, AZ 85756; (405) 898-9691; [email protected] for further information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Design Pressure: This irrigation system has been designed to operate with a minimum static and dynamic inlet water pressure of 45 psi at the point of connection or as designated on the drawings. The Contractor shall take a pressure reading prior to beginning construction. If the pressure reading is less than above, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative.

B. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in equipment usage, area dimensions or water pressure exist that might not have been considered in the engineering. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative in writing. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary.

C. Staking: Before installation is started, place a stake or marking flag where each sprinkler is to be located, in accordance with drawing. Staking shall be approved by the Owner's Representative before proceeding.



D. Piping Layout: Piping layout is somewhat diagrammatic. Route piping around existing trees and shrubs in such a manner as to avoid damage to plantings. Cut roots with a sharp axe to provide a clean cut. Do not dig within the ball of newly planted trees or shrubs.

E. In areas where trees are present, trenches are to be adjusted on site to provide a minimum clearance of eight times the trunk diameter of the tree (at its base) between any tree and any trench.

F. All material and equipment shall be delivered to the Worksite in unbroken reels, cartons or other packaging to demonstrate that such material is new and of a quality and grade in keeping with the intent of these Specifications.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to the depth indicated in these Specifications and Contract drawings. The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable. Trenches shall be wide enough to allow a minimum of 4" between parallel pipes and/or electrical wiring. Where rock excavation is required, or where stones are encountered in the bottom of the trench that would create a concentrated pressure on the pipe, the rock or stones shall be removed to a depth of 6" (minimum) below the trench depth indicated. The over depth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be backfilled with loose, moist earth or sand, thoroughly tamped. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such shall be removed to a depth and length required, and the trench backfilled to trench bottom grade as hereinafter specified, with course sand, or other suitable material.

B. Bottom of trench grade shall be continued past ground surface deviations to avoid air pockets and low collection points in the line. The minimum cover specifications shall govern regardless of variations in ground surface profile and the occasional deeper excavation required at banks and other field conditions. Excavation shall be such that a uniform trench grade variation will occur in all cases where variations are necessary.

C. Trench excavation shall comprise the satisfactory removal and disposition of all materials and shall include all shoring and sheeting required to protect the excavation and to safeguard employees as required by OSHA.

D. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edge of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted as directed by the Owner's Representative. When excavated material is of a rocky nature and the topsoil or any other layer of excavated material is suitable for pipe bedding and backfill in the vicinity of the pipe, such material shall be separately stockpiled for use in such bedding and pipe backfill operations, unless satisfactory imported material is used.


Section 32840- 10 of 13

E. All excavations and backfill shall be unclassified and covered in the basic bid. No additional compensation will be allowed for rock encountered.

F. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original conditions in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative.

G. Electrical conduit cut or broken is the responsibility of the contractor to correct unless the conduit is above 24" in depth or unmarked.

3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Irrigation Mains: Irrigation mains are that portion of piping from water source to solenoid valves. This portion of piping is subject to surges since it is a closed portion of the irrigation system. Irrigation mains shall be installed in a trench with a minimum of 18 inches of cover.

B. Lateral Piping: Lateral piping is that portion of piping from a solenoid valve out to an irrigation head. This portion of piping is not subject to constant pressure since it is an "open end" portion of the irrigation system. Lateral piping shall be installed in a trench with a minimum of 12 inches of cover.

C. Remove lumber, rubbish, and rocks from trenches. Provide firm, uniform bearing for entire length of each pipeline to prevent uneven settlement. Wedging or blocking of pipe will not be permitted. Remove foreign matter or dirt from inside of pipe before welding and keep piping clean during and after laying pipe.

D. PVC pipe shall not be installed or welded where there is water in the trench, nor shall PVC pipe be laid when temperature is 32 deg. F or below or when rain is imminent. PVC pipe will expand and contract as the temperature changes. Therefore, pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction.

E. Flush mainline piping prior to head installation.

F. Solvent: Use only solvent recommended by manufacturer to make solvent-welded joints following standards noted herein. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings of dirt, dust, and moisture with an approved PVC purple tinted primer before applying solvent. Bevel all male ends of pipe prior to making solvent welds.

G. PVC to Metal Connection: Work metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope such as Permatex No. 2 or "Teflon" tape on threaded PVC to metal joints. Use only light wrench pressure to tighten.

H. Threaded PVC Connections: Where required, use threaded Sch. 40 PVC adapters into which pipe may be welded.

I. Thrust Blocks: Thrust blocks shall be placed at changes in direction for all pipe above 3” in diameter. Thrust blocks may be omitted for HDPE pipe, provided all fittings are joined by heat fusion.

3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTS


Section 32840- 11 of 13

A. Pressure Test: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially backfilled, leaving the joints exposed for examination, the newly laid piping or any valved section of main pressure piping shall, unless otherwise specified, be subjected for four hours to a hydrostatic pressure test at normal city water pressure. Enclosed pipe, joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined during the partially open trench test. Joints showing visible leakage shall be replaced or remade, as necessary. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves leaking during this pressure test shall be replaced and retested until the test results are satisfactory. All replacement and repair shall be at Contractor's cost.

3.5 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION

A. All control wire less than 500 feet in length shall be continuous without splices or joints from the controller to the valves. Connections to the solenoid valves shall be made at the valve using connectors specified in Paragraph 2.4 of this section, unless otherwise approved by the Owner's Representative in writing.

B. All control wires shall be installed at least 18 inches deep. Contractor shall obtain the Owner's Representative's approval for wire routing when installed in a separate ditch. Control wires may be installed in a common ditch with piping; however, wires must be installed a minimum of 4 inches below or to one side of piping.

C. All wire passing under existing or future paving, sidewalk construction, etc., shall be encased in PVC Schedule 40 conduit extending at least 2 feet beyond the edges of paving, sidewalks, or construction.

D. Tape control wire bundles at 30'-0" on center maximum.

3.6 VALVE AND VALVE BOX PLACEMENT

A. All manual, electric, and quick coupling valves shall be in boxes as detailed and shall be set with a minimum of twelve (12) inches of space between their top surfaces. Boxes shall be in a straight line and evenly spaced off adjacent hardscape a minimum of three (3) feet.

B. Valves shall be fully opened and fully closed to ensure that all parts are in operating condition.

C. Valve boxes shall be set plumb, vertical, and concentric with the valve stem.

D. Any valve box, which has moved from this required position to prevent the use of the operating wheel of the valve or the ball valve, shall be reset by the Contractor at his own expense.

3.7 ELECTRIC SOLENOID CONTROL VALVES

A. Solenoid valves shall be located and sized as shown on the plans. All electrical connections shall be made when the weather is dry with connection kits as specified in Paragraph 2.4 of this section in strict accordance with manufacturer's


Section 32840- 12 of 13

recommended procedures. All remote control valves shall be installed in a horizontal position, in accordance to the manufacturer's published installation instructions.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish and install the proper size wire on each of the low voltage circuits from the controller to the solenoid control valves.

C. Consideration shall be given to each circuit for allowance of voltage drop and economy consistent with accepted practices of electrical installation. Under no circumstances shall the voltage of any circuit be reduced more than proper due to length of run exceeding the maximum allowable for the wire size used.

3.8 POP-UP SPRAY AND ROTARY HEADS

A. Provide heads and nozzles as specified and install in locations as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Pop-up spray heads shall be installed on a flexible connector directly to lateral piping as detailed on the Contract drawings. Heads shall be installed with the top of the case and nozzle flush with the soil level in turf areas and the top of the mulch layer in shrub beds.

C. Contractor will be required to adjust heads as necessary after establishment of grass or other plant material.

D. Bubblers will be installed on flexible connectors and set to grade as noted and illustrated in the details.

3.9 QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Quick coupling valves shall be installed on a swing-joint assembly as detailed on the drawings.

B. Each quick coupling valve shall include an isolation ball valve in the closed position

C. Under the warranty, the Contractor shall return to adjust valves and valve boxes to proper grade.

3.10 MANUAL VALVES

A. Manual valves shall be sized and located where shown on the Contract drawings.

B. Valve boxes shall be adjusted to be flush with finished grade. The Contractor will be required to adjust after establishment of grass.

C. Valve boxes shall be properly supported as detailed and of sufficient construction that tractors and mowers crossing over the boxes will not push boxes down and crush the pipe, valve, or box.

3.11 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION

A. After system is operating and required tests and inspections have been made, the trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for


Section 32840- 13 of 13

backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stone. Rock, broken concrete, or pavement, shall not be used as backfill material. The backfill shall be thoroughly compacted and brought even with the adjacent undisturbed soil level.

B. Compact trenches by thoroughly flooding the backfill and compacting. The jetting process may be used in areas when flooding.

C. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% density.

D. Any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and left in a completed surface condition as described above.

E. Specifically tamp backfill under heads and around the flange of heads for one foot (1') by a suitable means after trench backfill has dried from flooding to prevent movement of heads.

3.12 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A. After installation has been completed, make final adjustment of irrigation system prior to Owner's Representative's final inspection.

B. Completely flush system to remove debris from pipes without forcing debris through nozzles. Remove all nozzles from heads and turn on valves until clean water is being discharged. Replace nozzles.

C. Check nozzling for proper coverage. Prevailing wind conditions may indicate that an arc or angle of spray should be other than as shown on the drawings. In this case, change nozzles to provide correct coverage and furnish record data to Owner's Representative with each change.

D. Check and adjust each section for the proper operating pressure by use of the flow adjustment on each solenoid valve. Minimize any "misting" from sprinkler nozzles.

E. After system is thoroughly flushed and ready for operation, each section of sprinklers shall be adjusted to control pressure at heads.

3.15 CLEAN-UP

A. The Worksite shall be thoroughly cleaned of all waste materials and all unused or salvaged materials, equipment, tools, etc.

B. After completion of the work, areas disturbed shall be leveled and the Worksite shall be raked clean and left in an orderly condition.


Section 329200.1 - 1 of 7

SECTION 32 9200.1

FIELD TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included:

1. Grass work shall include sodding operations through final acceptance as indicated on plans and specified herein.

2. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform the sod-ding work, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Product Information: Representative samples or product information

of the following materials shall be provided to the Landscape Architect from the supply source being used: 1. Sod type (Tahoma 31 - Bermuda), growing conditions, and certification. 2. Fertilizer specifications and guaranteed analysis. 3. Topsoil chemical analysis and supplier.

B. Construction Schedule: At least two weeks prior to start of work, submit sodding schedule.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor's Qualifications

1. The work of this section shall be performed by a Contractor specializing in athletic field turfgrass installations.

2. The Contractor shall have successfully completed at least 5 installations of this type, size, and complexity in the last five years.

B. Turf shall comply with all government regulations prevailing at the supply source

and the job site. C. Sod to be grown in sandy loan soil free clay material.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Digging Sod

SECTION 329200.1 FIELD TURF AND GRASSES

Section 329200.1 - 2 of 7

1. Do not dig sod at the nursery or other approved source until ready to transport sod to the project site or approved storage location.

2. Before stripping, sod shall be mowed at a maximum uniform height of ¾“. 3. Cut sod to be rolled in long rolls, ½” thick and to standard width and

length desired. B. Transporting Sod

1. Sod transported to the Project in open vehicles shall be covered with tarps or other suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to prevent injury to the sod. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the sod. Evidence of inadequate protection against drying out in transit shall be cause for rejection.

2. Sod shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected at all times. Such protection shall encompass the entire period during which the sod is in transit, being handled, or in temporary storage.

3. Upon arrival at the temporary storage location or the site of the work, sod shall be inspected for proper shipping procedures. Should the roots be dried out, the Landscape Architect will reject the sod. When sod has been rejected, the Contractor shall remove it at once from the area of the work and replace it.

4. Unless otherwise authorized by the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours in advance of the an-ticipated delivery date of sod. A legible copy of the invoice, showing spe-cies and variety of sod included for each shipment shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect. Certificate of Inspection when required must ac-company each sod shipment.

C. Handling and Storage of Sod

1 No sod shall remain in temporary storage over 24 hours. 2. Sod shall be kept moist and shall be stored in a compact group to prevent

drying out or freezing. 3. Contractor shall take care in the handling of sod material to avoid breaking

or tearing strips. Sod that has been damaged by poor handling may be re-jected by the Landscape Architect.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not install seed or sod on saturated or frozen soil. B. Sod installation shall be subject to suitability of the weather and other conditions

affecting sod growth.


Section 329200.1 - 3 of 7

C. Planting season may be extended only with the written permission of the Land-scape Architect.

1.6 GUARANTEE A. Warrant all turf grass for a period of one year from date of Notice of Project

Completion, to be at least the quality and conditions as at Final Acceptance. Promptly resod unacceptable areas during the warranty period as directed by the Landscape Architect.

B. Lawn shall be uniform in color, grass type, leaf texture, leaf and root density, and

free from weeds, diseases, and other visible imperfections at acceptance. C. Guarantee does not cover damage as a result of fertilizers, pesticides, or other ap-

plications not supervised by the Contractor or as a result of acts of God or vandal-ism.

1.7 ACCEPTANCE A. The Landscape Architect will inspect all work for Project Acceptance upon writ-

ten request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection.

B. Acceptance will be based on establishment of a uniform stand of turfgrass, de-

fined as coverage of specified grass at a density of 95 percent coverage, with no bare spots greater than one square foot, free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects. For grass varieties selected, allow a minimum of 90 days for establishment and maintenance of an acceptable stand of grass.

C. Acceptance of sod is based on no joints between sod sections that are visible and

or felt and must be firmly rooted to the subgrade. D. Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the

judgment of the Landscape Architect, the Landscape Architect will recommend to the Owner that the work of this Section be accepted.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SPRIG A. None.

2.2 SOD


Section 329200.1 - 4 of 7

A. Sod shall be certified nursery grown on cultivated mineral agricultural soils. Sod shall have been mowed regularly and carefully and otherwise maintained from planting to harvest.

B. Sod shall be of species indicated. C. Width and Length: Sod shall be cut to the supplier's standard width and length.

Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be plus or minus 1/2” on width and plus or minus 5% on length. Broken strips and torn or uneven ends will not be accepted.

D. Strength of Sod Strips: Sod strips shall be strong enough to support their own

weight and retain their size and shape if suspended vertically when grasped in the upper 10% of the section.

E. Moisture Content: Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture con-

tent (excessively wet or dry) may adversely affect its survival. F. Time Limitations: Sod shall be harvested, delivered, and transplanted within a 24

hour period unless a suitable preservation method is approved by the Landscape Architect prior to delivery. Sod not transplanted within this period shall be in-spected and approved by the Landscape Architect prior to its installation.

G. Thatch: Sod shall be relatively free of thatch. A maximum of 1/4” (uncom-

pressed) thatch will be permitted. H. Diseases, Nematodes, and Insects: Sod shall be free of diseases, nematodes, and

soil borne insects. I. Weeds: Sod shall be free of objectionable grassy and broadleaf weeds.

2.3 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, part of the elements of which is derived

from organic sources. The percentages by weight shall be a minimum of 15-15-15, also containing 10-15% sulphate & traces of iron & zinc as approved by own-er.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Grade Preparation


Section 329200.1 - 5 of 7

1. Immediately before seeding or sodding, scarify, loosen, float and drag the upper 1-2 inches of topsoil to bring it to the proper condition. Remove for-eign matter larger than 1/2” in diameter.

2. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts or depressions that would cause water to stand or pond immediately after rainfall or operation of the lawn irrigation system, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before the com-mencement of fertilizing and planting. See Section 31 22 00.1 Baseball Field Grading.

3. If the prepared grade is eroded or compacted by rainfall prior to fertilizing, rework the surface to specified condition.

B. Fertilizing

1. Uniformly distribute fertilizer by mechanical means at the rate of 12 pounds per 1,000 square feet.

2. If applying a fertilizer with a percentage by weight not as specified, apply at the rate of 2 pounds actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet.

3. Work fertilizer into the soil after fine grading & not more than 2 days prior to grass planting. Cultivating equipment shall be set so the fertilizer will not penetrate into the soil more than 1 inch. Do not apply fertilizer when there is a possibility of rain before field areas can be seeded or sodded.

3.2 SPREADING OF TOPSOIL A. Topsoil and subgrade shall be damp when topsoil is spread. B. Topsoil shall be spread to a depth of 4 inches for all areas sodded. Provide addi-

tional topsoil depths as required to construct the grades indicated on the Draw-ings. Topsoil shall be compacted to recommendations of turf installer. Topsoil shall be as follows: 1. Natural, fertile, friable agricultural soil, having characteristics of repre-

sentative productive soils in the vicinity, and obtained from naturally well-drained areas.

2. Topsoil shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic sub-stances.

3. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be reasonably free from clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots, live plants, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations.


Section 329200.1 - 6 of 7

3.2 SPRIGGING A. None.

3.4 SODDING A. Weather Conditions

1. Schedule work for periods of favorable weather. 2. Sod placement on days that, in the judgment of the Landscape Architect,

are too hot, sunny, dry, or windy for optimal installation may be prohibit-ed.

B. Placement Pattern

1. Only rolled sod shall be used. Runs shall be maximized to minimize small pieces. Lay sod to avoid small and skinny pieces.

2. Plastic netting shall be removed and properly disposed of upon installation

as shown in the following photo: 3. The first row shall be laid in a straight line with subsequent rows parallel

to the first row and tightly abutting each other. 4. Lateral joints shall be staggered. Care shall be exercised to insure that the

sod is neither stretched nor overlapped. Joints must be butted tightly to minimize gaps from shrinkage and prevent voids that could permit air to dry out roots.

5. Immediately after placing, sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with sod bed by rolling to eliminate air pockets.

6. Immediately after sodding operations have been completed, entire surface shall be compacted with a roller or other approved equipment. The com-pleted area after sodding shall be uniformly even, firm, and true to fin-ished grade lines.

7. Sand joints and topdress turf with topdressing sand as necessary to provide a smooth uniform finished surface.

C. Watering


Section 329200.1 - 7 of 7

1. Provide an adequate supply of water at the site prior to and during trans-planting of the sod.

3.4 MAINTENANCE A. Immediately after sodding or sprigging the area shall be protected against traffic

or other use by erecting barricades as needed, and by placing approved warning signs at appropriate intervals.

B. Mow during establishment only for the purpose of weed control and to promote

quicker spreading. Mow to a 1” height. C. Fill any depressions or settlement that occurs within 90 days following installa-

tion. Resod bare spots that occur during the maintenance period as directed by the Landscape Architect.

D. Keep turf clean and protected from damage during the maintenance period. Debris

that accumulates shall be removed from the site. Promptly repair damaged turf except as provided in Paragraph 1.8, guarantee.

E. Irrigate as required to supplement natural rainfall so that all lawn areas receive

sufficient water for normal plant establishment and growth. F. A second fertilizer application shall be made 60 days after installation. The speci-

fied fertilizer shall be a ratio of 15-5-10 applied at 800 pounds per acre.

3.5 CLEANING, REMOVAL, AND REPAIR A. Paved areas over which hauling operations have been conducted shall be kept

clean. Promptly remove materials spilled on pavement. B. Upon completion of turf installation, remove from the site and legally dispose of

the following: 1. Surplus subgrade material. 2. Stone and foreign matter. 3. Excess topsoil not required for planting.

C. Repair existing turf damaged by operations under the contract. Repair shall in-

clude finish grading and sodding as required to match existing grade and lawn, and maintenance of repaired areas.

END OF SECTION

Section 329219 - 1 of 6

SECTION 32 9219

SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Preparation of planting surface.

B. Fertilizing.

C. Seeding.

D. Mulching.

E. Maintenance.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 329300 - Plants.

B. Section 328400 – Landscape Irrigation System.

C. Section 02934 - Sodding.

D. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Standardized Plant Names, 1942 Edition, American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature.

B. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel and Brome Grass.


Section 329212 - 2 of 5

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.


A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.

1.7 TESTS

A. None required.

1.8 MAINTENANCE DATA

A. None required.


A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer.

C. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 016000.

D. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with installation of underground sprinkler system piping and watering heads.

B. Coordinate the work of this Section with installation of trees, shrubs, and ground covers.

1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established, has achieved complete coverage, and exhibits a vigorous growing condition or until Final Acceptance whichever is longer. Maintenance period shall include minimum of two mowings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE SEED SUPPLIERS


Section 329212 - 3 of 5

A. As approved by Owner's Representative.

2.2 SEED TYPES

A. Common Bermuda grass: Cynodon dactylon,hulled, 97% pure, 85% germination, 1% or less weed seed.

B. Fertilizer: 10-20-10.

C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.

D. Mulching Material: Vegetative type consisting of the cereal straw from stalks of oats, rye, wheat or barley. The straw shall be clean and free of foreign materials and be sufficiently dry to spread properly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that areas are ready to receive the work of this Section.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Once area to receive work is ready, all weeds present are to be treated with an acceptable herbicide and given enough time to be effective, according to herbicide manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Prepared surface shall be floated smooth and free of bumps and depressions. Remove stones and foreign matter over 1 inches in diameter from top 2 inches of seedbed. Plant immediately thereafter, provided the bed has remained in a friable condition and has not become muddy or hard. If it has become hard, till to a friable condition again.

C. Finish grade areas to be seeded so that the surface is smooth and is 1/2 inch to 1 inch below adjoining sidewalks and other paving surfaces.

D. Test topsoil in areas to be seeded. Such tests shall be a composite of random samples. Test large areas or areas exhibiting different soil types separately.

3.3 FERTILIZING

A. Granular, non-burning product composed of not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer.


Section 329212 - 4 of 5

a. Type A: Starter Fertilizer, formula in accordance with approved laboratory soil test report(s) and time of application.

b. Type B: Top Dressing Fertilizer, formula in accordance with ap-

proved laboratory soil test report(s) and time of application.

3.4 SEEDING

A. Apply Bermuda seed at rate of 3 lbs per 1000 sq ft Rake in lightly.

B. Planting Season: Bermuda grass - May 15 to June 15.

C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods.

D. Roll seeded area with culti-packer or other approved equipment.

E. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been seeded. Saturate surface. Avoid run-off.

3.5 HYDROSEEDING

A. None.

3.6 WARRANTY

A. Date of Substantial Completion, reseed areas which show deterioration or bare spots in excess of 3% of any 100 square feet of seeded area. Repairs to be completed as specified in the Maintenance requirements below.

3.7 SEED PROTECTION

A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery or other approved method.

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.

B. Water sufficiently to insure germination and growth of grass.

C. Regrade to repair erosion damage and reseed.

D. Control growth of weeds where an excessive quantity of weeds develop. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.


Section 329212 - 5 of 5

E. Immediately reseed areas which show bare spots. Perform seeding operations as herein specified. Provide topsoil in areas subjected to erosion.

F. Protect seeded areas as necessary during maintenance period.

END OF SECTION

Section 329300 - 1 of 6

SECTION 32 9300

PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Trees, shrubs, vines and ground cover as applicable.

B. Topsoil backfill.

C. Staking and guying.

D. Maintenance service.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 328400 – Planting Irrigation.

B. Section 329223 – Sodding

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Standardized Plant Names, 1942 edition, American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature.

B. American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60), latest edition, American Association of Nurserymen.

C. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizer, Mixed, Commercial.


A. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under the direction of a skilled foreman.

B. Submit sources of plant materials. All materials to have name tags attached. Submit invoice with plant names noted if required.

C. Contractor shall locate all materials and be responsible for conformance with requirements of this Section. All plants not meeting requirements to be rejected.

D. Trees so noted on plant list will be reviewed at place of growth and tagged by Owner's Representative before digging. Contractor shall schedule review of plant material in such a manner that no single review period will exceed two

SECTION 329300 PLANTING

Section 329300 - 2 of 5

consecutive working days with a maximum of two review periods. Should additional review periods be necessary the contractor shall compensate the Owner for two people at the rate of $95.00 per hour each plus cost of travel. Contractor shall be responsible for notification and coordination with all parties prior to scheduling review sessions. Notice to Owner's Representatives to be given minimum of seven days prior to review session.

E. All trees are to be reviewed prior to planting.

F. Trees will be reviewed at local growing or nursery site by Owner's Representative and approved before delivering to the site. Contractor shall schedule review of plant material in such a manner that no single review period will exceed one working day with a maximum of two review periods. Contractor shall be responsible for notification and coordination with all parties prior to scheduling review sessions.

G. Prior to review by Owner's Representative, Contractor shall have pre-selected all trees and identified each with a "locking" tree tag. Additional tree tags will be provided by Contractor for changes at time of visit. Tree tags will have permanent, non-reproducible identifying notation unique to this project.

H. Submit topsoil source and analysis of topsoil to be retained on site or imported for backfill. Test performed by accredited soils laboratory. Submit soils test and recommendations for amendments including adjusting soil pH to a value between 6.0 and 7.0.


A. Move B&B plant materials with solid balls wrapped in burlap. Plants to be lifted only by ball or container.

B. Deliver plant materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plant materials not immediately installed moist and protect from freezing by covering ball or container with mulch. Any plants not planted within 2 days of delivery are to be heeled-in in a vertical position, root balls fully encompassed by mulch and a temporary watering system installed.

C. Reject plants when ball or container of earth surrounding roots has been cracked, broken or frozen preparatory to or during process of planting.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all plants to be living, healthy specimens for a period of one year commencing upon Date of Substantial Completion. Warranty period shall terminate only if plants have been in full leaf for 30 days at end of warranty period. Termination of warranty period shall be extended as necessary to comply. All materials to be in vigorous condition at end of warranty period.


Section 329300 - 3 of 5

B. Immediately remove dead plants and plants not in a vigorous condition and replace as soon as weather conditions permit. Each replacement shall be covered with one-year warranty commencing at time of planting.

C. Replacements: Match with adjacent plants of the same species in size and form.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

D. Begin maintenance of plant materials immediately after planting and continue until Final Completion.

E. Maintenance shall include measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in a vigorous and healthy growing condition. Include the following:

F. Cultivation and weeding of plant beds and tree pits. When herbicides are used for weed control, apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides.

G. Watering sufficient to maintain optimum moisture level.

H. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of prune wounds.

I. Disease and insect control.

J. Maintaining plants in an upright, plumb position, and repair of settling.

K. Maintenance of wrappings, guys, turnbuckles and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles or otherwise keep guy wires tight. Repair or replace accessories when required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ground Cover: Species and size identified in plant list. Plant materials shall be true to name, in good health, free of disease and insects, excellent in form and in complete conformance with ANSI Z60. All materials to be nursery grown.

B. Topsoil: Friable loam, typical of cultivated topsoils locally, containing at least 2% of decayed organic matter (humus) secured from a well drained, arable site, reasonably free of subsoil, stones, earth clods, sticks, roots or other objectionable extraneous matter or debris and containing no toxic materials. Topsoil to have acidity range of 6.0 to 7.0. Soils tests and amendments as described herein.

C. Mulch: Shredded cedar, cypress or hardwood; dyed brown in color. Double ground hardwood bark mulch equal to that produced by Foster Brothers, Wood Products Inc. www.fosterbros.com. Submit type and source for approval.


Section 329300 - 4 of 5

D. Fertilizer: Osmocote slow release 18-6-12.

E. Soil acidifier: Equal to TIGER 90 CR Organic Sulphur 0-0-0-90.

F. Compost: "Back to Earth Composted Cotton Burrs", premium compost, course screened, as manufactured by Soil Mender Products, LP, www.soilmender.com.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing - Wood bracing. Per Oklahoma City Parks Department Standard detail.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.3 PREPARATION

A. Verify topsoil is ready to receive the work of this Section. All areas to be planted with shrub or ground cover masses to have minimum 4 inch depth of topsoil and 2” of compost.

B. Remove all weeds and grasses from planting beds. Bermuda grass, if present, to be exterminated by approved means or all soil removed to 6 inch depth and replaced with topsoil free of bermuda grass.

C. Stake tree locations and place shrubs, vines, and ground covers for review and final orientation by Owner's Representative prior to installation.

D. Prepare topsoil for shrub and ground cover beds, after removing any vegetation with approved procedure, by tilling 2 inch layer (165 CF per 1000 sq. ft.) of compost into the upper 6 inches of soil.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for plant materials. Tree pits shall be 3 times the diameter of root ball. Depth to be 18” min. or height of rootball, whichever is greater. Circle to be centered on tree and true in form. Entire shrub bed areas to be excavated to a min. 12” depth and backfilled with topsoil and compost. Remove all subsoil, rock, and debris from site. Remove all excavated material from site.

B. Tree pits shall remain open with appropriate safety protection for approval by Owner’s Representative before backfilling.

C. Parking landscape islands to have all lime stabilization removed completely. Landscape island trees to be remain open with appropriate safety protection for approval by Owner’s Representative before backfilling.

D. Tree pits to be filled with prepared soil mix before planting of trees. Amendments to be thoroughly incorporated to 8” depth by tilling prior to planting of tree.

http://www.soilmender.com/


Section 329300 - 5 of 5

E. Set trees with top of root ball flush with finish grade, and other plant materials level with surrounding grade, after settlement.

F. Remove containers from container-grown stock. Set plants in center of pits and backfill with soil mix in 6 inch layers. Pull away ropes, wires, etc. from the top of the ball.

G. Remove any soil from the top of the rootball, to the level of the root flare.

H. Thoroughly water soil when the hole is half full, and again when full.

I. Apply 1/2 pound fertilizer evenly over cultivated area around each tree and 1 pound per 100 square feet to shrub and ground cover plantings.

J. Evenly spread a 2 inch layer of mulch over tree pits and planting beds.

K. Prune trees and shrubs after planting to improve form and to remove dead and broken branches.

L. 8’ diameter circular area around trees to be mulched and free of vegetation. For trees 2 inch and greater in caliper, area to be 8 feet in diameter. For trees less than 2 inch caliper, area to be 6 feet in diameter. Circle to be centered on tree and true in form.

M. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill topsoil in 6 inch layers. Maintain plant materials in vertical position.

3.2 PLANT SUPPORT

A. Brace plants upright in position by wood bracing as detailed. Wood bracing to be secured to tree with loops as detailed. All tree staking to be removed by the Contractor at the One Year Warranty review, unless otherwise directed by the Owner, with the stakes becoming the property of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

Section 012300 - 1 of 3

SECTION 01 2300

ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

B. Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the

Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, each party involved will be notified, in writing, of the status of each alternate. The notification will indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. A complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates will be included.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES

Section 012300 - 2 of 3

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ADD ALTERNATES

A. Add Alternate No. 1 – Vinyl Coated Chainlink Fence

1. Base Bid: Galvinized Chainlink Fence. 2. Alternate: Vinyl Coated Chainlink Fence. All fence components to be vinyl

coated or powder coated as required. Refer to plans for location.

B. Add Alternate No. 2 – Outfield Scoreboards.

1. Base Bid: Reconnect power supply and control wires to existing scoreboards. 2. Alternate: (4) new scoreboards provided by owner, electrical service to

scoreboards, and all items needed for installation, remove existing scoreboards at existing concession building.

C. Add Alternate No. 3 – Brick Veneer and Cap at Backstop

1. Base Bid: Poured in place concrete wall, footing, and all items need for

installation. 2. Alternate: Poured in place concrete wall, footing, brick veneer, wall cap and all

components needed. Refer to plans for location.

D. Add Alternate No. 4 – Seat Wall

1. Base Bid: Steel Edging. 2. Alternate: Brick seat wall, concrete footing, cap, and all items needed for

installation. Refer to plans for location.

E. Add Alternate No. 5 – Parking Lot Improvements

1. Base Bid: None. 2. Alternate: Demolition of concrete in parking lot to be used as rip rap, parking lot

islands and landscape, additional concrete panel replacement. Refer to plans for location.

SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES

Section 012300 - 3 of 3

F. Add Alternate No. 6 – Entry Sign Renovation

1. Base Bid: None. 2. Alternate: Renovation of entry sign and all items needed for installation. Refer to

plans.

END OF SECTION


SPECIAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS – PAVING

These Special Technical Provisions-Paving are included in and are a part of the Bidding Documents for this project.

1. Water Meter BoxesTraffic rated boxes will be required where a water meter falls within a paved area or anarea to be paved. Type of box shall be an approved City design. See attached meterlocation detail. Pavement for setting of water meter boxes shall include all gradeadjustments required.

All work required to adjust, relocate or replace Water Meters and/or Meter Boxes shall beperformed by a pre-qualified, approved water meter contractor. A list of current prequalified water meter contractors may be obtained from the Utilities Department MeterShop, 621 N. Pennsylvania Avenue (405-297-3990).

2. Erosion/Sediment ControlsUnless otherwise provided for by the Plans and/or Specifications, it is the intent thatconstruction fully comply with the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) NationalPollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) general permit requirements. Thecontractor will be required to conduct the work in a manner that will prevent pollutants orsediment from leaving the construction site. The contractor who is awarded a City ownedproject is responsible for obtaining all applicable storm water discharge permits and theinstallation, maintenance, and inspection of all erosion controls and other BestManagement Practices (BMP). A storm water quality construction or land disturbancepermit is required on any disturbance prior to the start of land disturbing activities.Construction activity that results in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one (1)acre, or less than one (1) if part of a greater common plan of development or sale thattotals at least one (1) acre, must also obtain a permit from Oklahoma Department ofEnvironmental Quality (ODEQ) for storm water discharges from Construction Activities.This means land disturbance of one (1) acre or more must permit with both ODEQ and theCity of Oklahoma City. The contractor shall submit to the City of Oklahoma City StormWater Quality (SWQ) division a Notice of Intent (NOI), Storm Water PollutionPrevention Plan (SWPPP), Erosion Control Site Plan, and permit fee. A JurisdictionalDetermination from the Oklahoma Corps of Engineers will be required if the USGS 7.5Minute Quadrangle maps indicate the “Waters of the United States” and “Wetlands” existwithin this project. There will be additional requirements if the project is within an areathat has an EPA approved Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL), Watershed plan, orMunicipal Compliance plan.

Prior to any land disturbing activities, a Notice of Intent (NOI) will be required to besubmitted to the City of Oklahoma City SWQ, ODEQ and have an approved landdisturbing permit. Typical BMP’s and details are included and must be adhered to duringconstruction. Areas of work and work schedule may be dictated by the need to complywith the sediment control requirements. The Engineer or his representative may requireadditional measures beyond those shown in the plan as necessary to comply with EPA


requirements. All control measures must be maintained in serviceable condition throughout the duration of the project and removed and properly disposed of upon completion. The contractor shall appoint personnel to make the inspections of the control devices as specified in the SWPPP and make available to the City Inspector for review.

Payment for temporary erosion control devices shall be as noted in the bid proposal and shall include all costs of permitting and reporting. The contractor will maintain temporary erosion control until revegetation is established and accepted by the City, and a Notice of Termination (NOT) has been approved by the City of Oklahoma City and ODEQ.

3. RevegetationIn areas where sod is to be placed, the Contractor shall determine the type of existing sodcover and replace in kind. Sod shall be placed and maintained in accordance with theStandard Specifications.

A Notice of Termination should be filed with the City of Oklahoma City Storm WaterQuality Division and/or ODEQ after the permitted project has reached revegetation thatconsists of 70% per square foot of all area disturbed during construction. Storm WaterDischarge permits will not be terminated until such vegetation has been reached.

4. Private Lawn Irrigation Systems on Public Right of WayIf the Contractor encounters a private lawn irrigation system in the public right of waywhich obstructs the proposed construction (sidewalks, driveways, ramps, etc.), theContractor shall cut, cap and remove it to the minimum extent possible, causing the leastamount of damage to the lawn irrigation system. The Contractor shall provide 1 ½-inchPVC conduit(s) under the proposed sidewalk to assist the property owner withreconnecting the lawn irrigation system and shall coordinate its placement with them. Theproperty owner shall be responsible for reconnecting their lawn irrigation system andmaking it operational upon completion of the work. The Contractor shall mark thelocations of said conduit(s) and where the system was cut and capped. All Contractorcosts for the above- mentioned materials and labor shall be included in the price bid forother items of work.

5. ExcavationUnless otherwise provided in the proposal, grading and/or excavation required to meetexisting driveway grades shall be considered incidental and the cost thereof shall beincluded in other items of work. Existing material from ditches shall be utilized toremove edge drop-offs from new pavement at no additional cost. Where existing materialis not present, contractor shall utilize millings or aggregate base material to shoulder upand shall be paid under the bid item of aggregate base. Material shall be wheel compactedupon placement.

The cost of excavation for sidewalks, driveways, edge of payment drop-offs, etc. shall beincluded in the price bid for other items of work.

6. Proof Rolling


A. Pavement (Milled and Non-milled)Cold Milled Pavement: The contractor shall proof roll the pavement surface to detectareas in need of pavement repair. The vehicle provided shall have an axle load of34,000 pounds. The entire milled surface shall be proof rolled at a walking speed sothat the construction inspector can mark the areas in need of pavement repair. ProofRolling Pavement shall be paid for by the square yard as provided for in the bidproposal.

Non-milled Pavement:For pavement that has not been milled, the contractor shall use a vehicle of equivalentweight and axle loading to perform the proof rolling, as approved by the Engineer.The other requirements and basis of payment are stated above.

B. Proof Rolling SubgradeThe contractor shall proof roll the completed subgrade prior to the start of pavingoperations. The vehicle provided shall have an axle load of 17,000 pounds. The entiresubgrade surface shall be proof rolled at a walking speed so that the constructioninspector can mark the areas requiring remedial measures. Proof Rolling Subgradeshall be paid for by the square yard.

7. Aggregate Base MaterialSidewalks, wheelchair ramps, retaining walls, etc.All foundation base material for sidewalks, wheelchair ramps, retaining walls, etc. shallconsist of 2-inch minimum thickness of 1.5-inch crusher run, 3/8-inch rock screenings,1.5- inch recycled concrete or approved equal. This requirement shall replace otherspecifications or plan details requiring a sand base. The base material shall be wateredproperly and compacted before concrete placement. The cost of the base material shall beincluded in the price bid for other items of work.

Concrete Streets and DrivewaysType A Aggregate or Recycled Concrete base must be used for streets and driveways. Therecycled concrete must meet the requirements of SECTION 923-AGGREGATE,MISCELLANEOUS USES of the Standard Specifications. Said base material to be paidfor separately.

8. P.C. Concrete Panel RepairWhere only one lane is to be removed and replaced, transverse joints will match existingjoints in the remaining lane. Where both lanes will be removed and replaced, transversejoints shall not exceed 15-foot spacing nor be less than 10-feet. Transverse constructionand contraction joints shall be dowelled using 1-inch diameter X 18-inch long dowels.1¼” diameter x 18-inch dowels shall be required for pavement repairs exceeding 8”thickness. The concrete panel must be doubled sawed 6” apart to protect the permanentedge during excavation. The dowel spacing shall be at 18-inch centers. Longitudinal jointsshall use No. 5 X 18-inch deformed tie bars at 18-inch centers. The cost of dowels, tiebars, pavement sawing, subgrade compaction and concrete removal are to be included inthe price bid for PC Concrete Pavement. Use Class AA 4000 PSI (HES) concrete.


Where repairs are to be made on streets with integral curb, saw cut 2-feet from the face of curb for slab removal. Where curb and gutter were constructed, saw cut at the face of gutter. Cost of saw cut to be included in cost of PCC pavement patching.

9. Hot Mix Asphalt PavingA. Plant Mix Bituminous Bases and Surfaces, (Superpave)

This special provision adopts in the entirety the Requirements of the ODOT 2019Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Section 411 Hot Mix Asphalt;Section 708 Plant Mix Bituminous Bases and Surfaces; and ODOT Special Provisionfor Plant Mix Bituminous Bases and Surfaces Superpave), 708-26 9a-f) 09, issued3/19/2012; except as note below:

Any references to the Department, Resident Engineer or Materials Engineer shall beinterpreted to mean the City and the City Engineer.

On Residential Streets, S3 Base Courses and S5 Surface Courses shall use bindergrade PG 58-28 OK with a maximum of 15% Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP).Design mixes, including acceptable test results indicating a final surface performancegrade of PG 64-22 OK will be required prior to approval of a mix for use in the Cityof Oklahoma City. If the contractor elects to use no RAP in the surface mix, a bindergrade of PG 64-22 OK shall be utilized.

On Major Collector and Arterial Streets, S3 Base Courses shall use binder grade PG58-28 OK with a maximum of 15% RAP. S5 Surface Course shall utilize a PG 64-28with a Maximum of 15% RAP. Courses Design mixes, including acceptable testresults indicating a final performance grade of PG 70-28 OK will be required prior toapproval of a mix for use in the City of Oklahoma City. If the contractor elects to useno RAP in the surface mix, a binder grade of PG 70-28 OK shall be utilized.

Natural sand allowed in all mixes containing RAP will be reduced by an amount equal to the natural sand in the RAP, which is assumed to be 30%.

Where PG 70-28 OK or PG-78-28 OK asphalt is specified in the plans or proposal, the design mix shall be based on > 3 million ESAL’s.

It is the intent of these specifications to place a minimum of 0.94 x maximum theoretical density of the job mix design in pounds per cubic foot of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) resurfacing per square yard per inch thick of pavement to be surfaced. To allow for tolerance, HMA placed will be accepted for payment up to 1.02 x maximum theoretical density in pounds per cubic foot of the job mix formula per square yard per inch thick as shown on the Typical Section. In other words, the plan quantity cannot be exceeded by more than 9% or no additional payment will be made for the overage.


No additional payment will be allowed for HMA placed that exceeds the width or thickness shown or designated by the Engineer. The total weight of HMA placed for each square yard of pavement resurfaced shall be computed by dividing the total weight of HMA placed by the total square yards of pavement as shown to be resurfaced on the Typical Section and plans.

The target density for all HMA is 95% and the acceptable range shall be 93%-96%. If out of this range, then no payment shall be made.

Low hanging tree limbs shall be trimmed to allow the placement of hot mix asphalt. The cost of this work shall be included in other items of work.

Contractors must use a Material Transfer Vehicle (MTV) when laying HMA surface course on an arterial street one mile in length, or more.

B. Warm Mix Asphalt Material RequirementsUpon approval by the engineer Warm Mix Asphalt may be used.

C. Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS)Use of post-manufactured RAS or post-consumer RAS is not permitted.

D. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)Asphalt binder from RAP is designated as reclaimed asphalt binder.

E. Hot Mix Asphalt Surface Course 1” Thick and LessThe contractor shall determine the best compactive effort to achieve proper density.Roll to the point of break over and then back off one pass. For example, if three passeswith the roller and achieves a density of 95% with the nuclear density tester, and onthe 4th pass the density is 94.8%, the best compactive effort would be with a rollingpattern of 3 passes. Do not use a vibratory steel wheel roller on Thinlay.

F. Tack Coat MaterialThe tack material shall be CSS-1h or CBC-1h. The application rate shall be 0.15Gallons/Square Yard of diluted emulsion, diluted with water at a ratio of 1:1. Thisratio means that one-part water and one-part emulsion is mixed to apply the tack.Therefore, if the total application rate is 0.15 Gallons/Square Yard, then the emulsionrate is 0.075 Gallons/Square Yard. The 1:1 dilution rate shall not be changed by thecontractor. The emulsion shall be measured and paid for by the gallon, beforedilution. The tack coat application rate may be adjusted slightly based on fieldconditions, with approval of the Project Engineer or Construction Inspector. The tackcoat shall be completely cured before placing the hot mix asphalt.

Before the hot mix asphalt is laid, the pavement surface shall be cleaned thoroughly tothe satisfaction of the Engineer. First, a minimum of two power broom passes shall bemade to remove larger dirt/debris particles from the pavement surface. Second, aminimum of two street sweeper (regenerative air, combined mechanicalbroom/vacuum) passes shall be made to remove smaller particles and dust. The street


sweeper shall be a Schwarze A-7, Schwarze A-4, Elgin Crosswind J D, or approved equal, which can remove PM10 fines. The U.S.E.P.A. defines PM10 as particulate matter having nominal aerodynamic diameter of 10 micrometers (um) or less.

The tack coat shall be applied, with a sprayer approved by the Engineer. Tests (ASTM D 2995) shall be required to verify the application rate of the distributor truck. All contact surfaces of curbs and gutters, manholes and other structures shall be painted with a thin uniform coat of asphaltic material used for the tack coat.

10. Tactile Markers/Truncated DomesThe following are the approved manufacturers of Cast in Place, Cast in Place Replaceableand Surface Applied Tactile Markers / Truncated Domes;

Manufacturer Part Numbers

Cast in Place Cast in Place Replaceable

Surface Applied

Armor-Tile Tactile Systems

ADA-C-2460 ATH-R-2460 ADA-S-2460

Answer Industries N/A 24C-1R 24S-1R Access Product Inc. N/A ACC-R-2X5 ACC-S-2X5 ADA Solutions, Inc. 2460IDPAV2 2460REP 2460IDRET2

The standard color for all Tactile Markers/Truncated Domes is Brick Red (Federal Color No. 22144).

Cast-in-Place Replaceable Tactile Markers/Truncated Domes shall be used when a new concrete ramp is being installed. If approved by the Engineer, Surface Applied Tactile Markers/Truncated Domes may be used when the existing ramp meets all required ADA regulations, except that it does not have tactile markers/truncated domes. When Surface Applied Tactile Markers / Truncated Domes are used, they shall not be glued in place to the existing ramp. Surface applied Tactile Markers / Truncated Domes shall be secured in place by screws per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Cast in Place Replaceable Tactile Markers / Truncated Domes shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of five (5) years from date of final completion. The guarantee includes defective work, breakage, deformation, fading and loosening of tiles. A two foot by five- foot area of Tactile Markers/Truncated Domes shall have at least 11 anchors.

11. Cold MillingA. Pavement-Locating Water Valve Boxes and Manholes

Prior to cold milling the pavement, the Contractor shall locate all water valve boxesand manholes by painting a “V” or “MH” on the top of the adjacent curb andmeasuring the perpendicular distance from the face of curb. Said measurements shallalso be painted on the top of curb and be provided to the construction inspector inwriting including the adjacent address. If a water valve box or manhole has been


previously covered and cannot be located, the City will provide the measurements to the Contractor, so he can locate, adjust and construct a concrete collar around them per MD 11 or MD 12.

B. Fine Milling of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) or Portland Cement Concrete PavementThe removal of HMA or concrete pavement shall be accomplished using a fine millingmachine. The rotary drum shall utilize carbide tip tools spaced not more than 5/16inches apart. The forward speed of the milling machine shall be limited to no morethan 45 feet/minute.

Protection shall be provided around existing catch basin inlets, manholes, utility valveboxes, and any similar structures. Any damage to such structures because of themilling operation is the Contractor’s responsibility and shall be repaired at theContractor’s expense. To prevent the infiltration of milled material into the stormdrainage system, the Contractor shall take special care to prevent the milled materialfrom falling into the inlet openings or inlet grates. Any milled material that has falleninto inlet openings or inlet grates shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.

The milled surface shall provide a riding surface with a uniform textured appearance.The milled surface shall be free from gouges, longitudinal grooves and ridges, oilfilm, and other imperfections that are a result of defective equipment, improper use ofequipment, or poor workmanship. The Contractor, under the direction of the inspector,shall perform random spot-checks to assure the variation of the top of two ridges shallnot exceed ¼ inch. The variation of the top of any ridge to the bottom of the grooveadjacent to that ridge shall not exceed ¼ inch. ASTM E965-15, “Standard TestMethod for Measuring Pavement Macrotexture Depth Using a Volumetric Technique”shall be used to determine if the fine milling operation meets this specification. 100 mlof test material shall be used, and the acceptable average diameter shall be 5.6 inches.ASTM E965-15 shall be required at only one location at the beginning of each finemilling project.

Any unsatisfactory surfaces produced are the responsibility of the Contractor and shallbe corrected at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Thedepth of removal will be verified by taking measurement every 250 feet per each passof the milling machine, or as directed by the Engineer. These depth measurementsshall be used to monitor the average depth of removal.

Where a surface delamination between HMA layers or a surface delamination ofHMA on Portland Cement Concrete causes a non-uniform texture to occur, the depthof milling shall be adjusted +/- ½ inch or until delamination is eliminated. Whenremoving a HMA pavement entirely from an underlying Portland cement concretepavement, all the HMA pavement shall be removed leaving a uniform surface ofPortland cement concrete, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

Method of Measurement: This work will be measured for payment by the number ofsquare yards of area from which the milling of asphalt has been completed and the


work accepted. No area deductions will be made for minor un-milled areas such as catch basin inlets, manholes, utility boxes and any similar structures.

If Contractor elects to fine mill a large area of pavement which will be exposed for an extended period, then he must deal with the dust, pavement protrusions (valve boxes, manholes, etc.) bumps at each end of the milled street, etc. to the satisfaction of the City Engineer at no extra cost to the City. Proper signage must be placed to warn citizens of the potential hazards. All resulting pavement failures must be repaired at no cost to the City.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard for “Fine Milling” to the depth(s) specified. This price shall include all equipment, tools, labor, and materials incidental thereto. No additional payments will be made for multiple passes with the milling machine to remove the bituminous surface.

No separate payments will be made for cleaning the pavement prior to paving; providing protection and doing handwork removal of bituminous concrete around catch basin inlets, manholes, utility valve boxes and any similar structures; repairing surface defects as a result of the Contractors negligence; providing protection to underground utilities from the vibration of the milling operation; removal of any temporary milled transition; removal and disposal of millings; furnishing a sweeper and sweeping after milling. The costs for these items shall be included in the contract unit price for Fine Milling.

12. HandrailHandrails are necessary for any sidewalk (pedestrian path) drop-off of 18-inches orgreater or as directed by the Engineer. This item will be measured by the Linear Foot forthe sections of railing completed in place in compliance with the Standard Specificationsor special details provided with the proposal.

13. Retaining WallsConcrete shall be Class “A” concrete (3500 PSI). All exposed edges shall have a 3/4inchchamfer. This item will be measured by the cubic yard of concrete completed in place incompliance with the Standard Specifications or special details provided with the proposal.

14. Articulating Joint StripsArticulated joint strips may be used in sidewalk construction adjacent to a tree to preventfuture trip hazards. Use as directed by the City Engineer. The material shall be“TripStop”, manufactured by Access Products Inc., or approved equal.

15. Asphalt Crack Repair-2” and WiderTransverse asphalt cracks 2” wide or wider shall be repaired by removing the asphalt andcleaning the crack. The trench width shall be a minimum of 6” and the trench depth shallbe a minimum of 6” or the depth of the asphalt pavement, whichever is greater. The trenchwalls shall be vertical. The trench must be filled with “Class C” (2400 PSI strength within


3 days) concrete up to the existing pavement surface. The bottom of the trench shall be firm and unyielding before concrete placement. A two-foot-wide strip of “Geo-Composite Fabric Membrane (2 Feet Wide)” (Bid Item 822-01) must be centered and placed on the trench. The “Geo-Composite Fabric Membrane” must be installed per the requirements of Item No. 24 of this section. The fabric will be paid for separately.

The per linear foot payment for asphalt crack repair 2” and wider shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials (excluding the fabric), labor, equipment, tools and incidentals, and for performing the work in accordance with these specifications. The Engineer and/or the Inspector shall mark the asphalt cracks to be repaired.

16. Asphalt Crack Repair-Greater than 3/4” to Less than 2”Asphalt cracks greater than 3/4" to less than 2” wide in pavement surfaces to be overlaidwith Hot Mix Asphalt shall be cleaned by blowing out the cracks using a 90-psi aircompressor and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Cleaned cracks shall be filled byhand with Type S6 Hot Mix Asphalt prior to resurfacing. Said asphalt shall be placedabout 3/8” to 1/2” above the existing pavement surface to allow for compaction. A smallsteel wheel roller shall be used to compact the asphalt.

17. Asphalt Crack Repair-0” to ¾” (Bid Item 310-04)The asphalt crack seal material shall be Crafco Polyflex Type 2 – Part No. 34518, RPFLEX 2 or approved equal. The Crafco “Product Data Sheet” and “InstallationInstructions for Hot-Applied Roadsaver, Polyflex, Parking Lot and Asphalt RubberProducts” are included in the Specifications and Special Provisions.

The crack seal material must be placed first when also using Type S6 Hot Mix AsphaltCrack Repair to fill cracks between ¾” and 2”. To be clear, cracks between 0” and ¾” aresealed only with Crafco Polyflex Type 2-Part No. 34518 or approved equal. Cracksgreater than ¾” to less than 2” are filled only with Type S6 Hot Mix Asphalt. If narrowcracks (0” to ¾”) intersect wider cracks (3/4” to 2”), the Crafco sealant must be installedfirst.

Whenever a leveling course is used, 0” to ¾” cracks must be cleaned but not sealed.Cleaning consists of 90 psi compressed air, brushing or vacuum techniques to removedebris.

18. Driveway/Sidewalk-Construction, Removal and ReplacementThe measuring of removal and replacement of 6-inch PCC driveway includes from theedge of the roadway to the property line. If the gutter is removed in front of the drive, thisremoval and replacement will be considered and paid for as driveway removal anddriveway replacement.

Where a new driveway is being constructed in conjunction with a sidewalk, the contractorshall install two #4 tie bars 18” in length connecting the two, and provide a keyedconstruction joint between the two, at no additional cost. In addition, where commercialor residential structures are located lower than the street, the highest point of the sidewalkwhere it crosses a driveway must be at the same elevation as the top of curb.


Where a new concrete sidewalk is being placed adjacent to existing concrete drive, the sidewalk shall be poured 6-inches thick one panel length (5’) and paid as driveway (square yards).

Where new concrete is being placed adjacent to existing concrete, a 2-inch by 2-inch lip shall be excavated below the existing concrete to help prevent differential settlement. The concrete shall taper back to the normal thickness of the slab in a distance of 12-inch. For example, if a new 4-inch thick sidewalk is being placed adjacent to an existing 4-inch thick sidewalk, the thickness of the new sidewalk will be 6-inch thick where it abuts the existing sidewalk.

19. Existing Concrete Pavement Joint and Crack SealingJoints-Joints shall be sealed per the City’s Standard Specifications, Section 310-ConcreteJoint Rehabilitation and ODOT’s Roadway Standard LECS-4, “Joints and Sealers-Longitudinal, Expansion and Contraction”. All joints shall be widened 1/4-inch (1/8” oneach side of the joint) to remove all dirt and debris. Joints must be sealed with silicone.

Random Cracks-All cracks shall be routered and blown out using filtered oil free andmoisture free air at a minimum of 90 PSI and 120 CFM. Blowing out of the crack shall beaccomplished by using a blow tube that will fit into the crack. If the crack extends down toa muddy subgrade, a heat lance (propane heated compressed air) shall be used to clean thecrack. If necessary, sand blasting can also be used to clean a crack after routering. Thedepth of crack cleaning shall be the crack width plus 1/4-inch. The crack sealant is “RPGray Sealant” manufactured by the Right/Pointe Company (www.rightpointe.com) orapproved equal.

Curb & Gutter-The curb and gutter shall be cleaned as stated in “Joints” above and sealedusing Sonneborn Sonolastic NP1 Polyurethane Sealant or approved equal. Unlessotherwise provided, the curb and gutter sealant shall be paid for by the linear foot underBid Item No. 310-03, “Cleaning and Sealing Concrete Joints”.

Street Clean Up-After joints and cracks have been cleaned and sealed; the contractor shallclean the pavement surface of dust and debris deposited by the crack and joint cleaningoperation. This shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to scheduling a finalinspection.

Note: The joint or crack sealant manufacturer’s “Installation Specification” shallgovern if it is more restrictive than the above specifications.

Whenever a leveling course is used, 0” to ¾” cracks must be cleaned, no sealingrequired. Cleaning shall have all dirt and debris removed.

20. Construction Traffic ControlThe daily maintenance of traffic control devices on the job site shall be performed by aContractor employee that is a “Certified Work Zone Temporary Traffic Control


Technician”. The certification must be from a nationally recognized organization approved by the City of Oklahoma City.

A Traffic Control Plan (TCP) shall be required for all work performed on arterial and/or collector streets, or other such locations as may be determined by the Engineer. The TCP shall be reviewed by the Public Works Department, Traffic Management Division before any work is performed. The cost of the TCP shall be included in “Construction Signing and Traffic Control”.

The City reserves the right to remedy (at the Contractor’s expense) any neglect on the part of the Contractor regarding the public convenience and safety, upon twenty-four (24) hour written notice. In cases of emergency, the City shall have the right to remedy without written notice to the contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

The Contractor shall be responsible for replacement of all Traffic Control Devices damaged, destroyed or removed during construction. All Traffic Control Devices installed shall be in accordance with the latest Traffic Standards and Specifications and shall conform to the current adopted edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

21. Concrete Valley GuttersThe cost for 8” Concrete Valley Gutters (Class AA 4000 PSI HES) shall includepavement saw cut and removal, excavation, reinforcing steel (as shown on the plans),concrete, and subgrade compaction (95% Standard Proctor Density). Concrete valleygutters shall be constructed after the asphalt paving work has been completed.

22. Saw Cut PavementAll pavement (concrete or hot mix asphalt) shall be saw cut using a walk behind sawmounted on wheels. Handheld saws are not allowed.

For all removal items of work, the cost of saw cut shall be incidental.

23. Seating of PC Concrete PavementPrior to overlaying with asphalt, saw cut completely through the existing PC concretepaving 2’0” from face of curb (unless otherwise directed); seat the concrete with at leasttwo passes of a 50 ton (minimum) pneumatic, self-propelled roller. Roller speed shall notexceed 4 mph and vibration will not be permitted.

Payment will be made by the square yard measured in place of SEATING PCCONCRETE PAVING and will include the cost of saw cut.

24. Geo-Composite Fabric MembraneGeo-composite fabric membrane (2 feet wide), used to reinforce and waterproof pavementcracks and joints to reduce reflective cracking of asphalt concrete overlays, shall becomposed of flexible, high density asphalt mastic bitumen between a top layer of heatresistant, high strength woven polyester reinforcing fabric and a bottom layer of non-


woven beat resistant polyester fabric. Geo composite fabric material may be supplied with a polymer modified asphalt self-adhesive layer and removable release liner.

Geo-composite fabric membrane shall be protected from moisture and rain and stored at temperatures not exceeding 120ºF. Any material that becomes wet prior to installation shall be removed from the jobsite and discarded in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

The surface upon which the geo-composite fabric membrane will be placed shall be free of dirt, water and vegetation. Surface cracks and joints less than 3/8” wide shall have no organics within the crack. Surface cracks/joints and other distressed areas 3/8” or greater, but less than 2” wide shall be cleaned and filled with an approved crack filler or Type S-6 Asphalt compacted to the existing surface elevation. Cracks/joints and other distressed areas greater than 2” wide shall be cleaned and filled with Type S-6 Asphalt compacted to the existing pavement surface elevation. Cracks and /or joints with a vertical elevation variation greater than ½” shall be wedged with compacted with type S-6 Asphalt to level the distressed area.

The material shall be applied when existing surface temperature is a minimum of 50ºF. The existing road surface shall be clean and dry prior to installation.

The use of solvents (i.e. kerosene, gasoline, diesel fuel, etc.) or other materials such as those used to clean paving equipment and tools is strictly prohibited. If such solvents or materials come in contact with the material, the contaminated stress relief materials shall be removed immediately from the roadway and discarded in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

Place the material immediately after the binder coat is applied to the surface. Keep the roll of material in tension during placement. The woven polyester side of the material shall be placed face up exposed to traffic, with the non-woven polyester side placed into the tack coat. The material shall be centered as close as possible over the crack or joint.

The Binder Coat may be applied with a hand-held wand and nozzle that produces a fan shaped spray, or with a hand-held wand without a nozzle and a squeegee to spread the tack coat evenly at the specified rate and width. The binder coat shall be applied at a rate of 0.15 gallons per square yard on existing surfaces or 0.20 gallons per square yard of milled surface. The binder coat shall extend a maximum of 1 ½” beyond the edges of the material being placed. Application of the binder directly from the distributor bar on a distributor truck is prohibited for all transverse applications. For longitudinal applications, the distributor truck nozzles should be set at 20º to the axis of the bar and care must be taken to apply the binder at the correct width and rate.

Where transverse and longitudinal joints/cracks intersect, the material may be lap or butt jointed. Where overlaps are employed, they shall be made in the direction of paving operations and should be a minimum of 2” and a maximum of 5” in length, and the overlapping pieces shall be bonded with asphalt binder coat. Laps resulting from three layers are not permitted.


Immediately after placement, the material shall be rolled on the binder coat with a riding static drum or rubber wheeled roller, taking care to ensure that the edges of the material are securely bonded to the pavement surface. A rubber wheeled roller shall be used on milled surfaces. The rolling in process shall consist of three or more passes.

The material may be opened to traffic as soon as the binder cost has cooled sufficiently to lose its stickiness. The material shall not be left exposed for more than 24 hours where breaking traffic is expected, or on grades of 5% or greater. The material shall not be left exposed for more than seven days unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Resurfacing operations are not permitted to commence until the material is thoroughly bonded to the existing surface. Once the material is properly installed, it may be exposed to moisture and rain prior to the application of the overlay. However, the material must be dry at the time the overlay is placed.

A paving tack coat applied at the rate stated in plans shall be used over the material prior to paving. Cutback asphalts are prohibited. Dry washed sand or limestone dust may be broadcast ahead of the paver if the material is sticking to the tires of trucks or paving equipment. If a vibratory roller is used during compaction of the overlay, care must be taken to avoid excessive amplitude. The vibratory roller should be set to the lowest amplitude and highest frequency settings.

The use of emulsified asphalts and/or cutback asphalts is strictly prohibited for use as a tack to bond the material to the existing paving surface.

Geo-Composite Fabric Membrane Specification Material provided shall conform to the following specifications:

Cold Flexibility ASTM D146 (modified) Tensile Strength (Peak) 2,000 psi No cracking or separation of fabric minimum

ASTM D412 (modified) Elongation 20 % minimum ASTM D412 (modified) Weight 0.8 lbs. /sq. ft. (typical) N/A Mastic Density 80 PCF min. ASTM D70 Density (mastic) 80 lbs. /cubic ft. minimum ASTM D70 Thickness 0.135 inches minimum ASTM D1777 Thickness Retention 75% minimum retained after loading ASTM D395 (modified) Absorption (mastic) 1% Maximum ASTM D517 Brittleness Passes ASTM D517 Puncture Resistance 450 lbs. minimum ASTM E154 Mastic Softening Point (mastic) 210°F. Minimum ASTM D36

• Note: Sampling in accordance with ASTM D146.

Basis of Payment:


Geo-Composite Fabric Membrane shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of material of the width specified in the proposal, complete and in place. The cost of tack coat, crack/joint sealing and all other items and materials incidental to the construction and required by the specifications shall not be paid for separately but shall be included in the price bid for Geo-Composite Fabric membrane.

25. Pavement RepairThe Pavement Repair bid item may be used for asphalt or concrete streets.

26. Delivery SurchargeWhere provided for in the bid items - DELIVERY SURCHARGE (ONE WAY) (OVER 5MILES) - will be paid for asphalt tonnage delivered to the project site beyond 5 miles fromthe asphalt plant. The price for all other items delivered to the project shall be included inother items unless otherwise provided for in the proposal.

27. Storm Water Curb OpeningsStorm Water Curb Openings shall be Neenah Foundry Catalog No. R-3262-3 (for 6” curb)or R-3262-6 (for 8” curb) or approved equal. The cost of all materials and labor are to beincluded in the price bid for this bid item.

28. Stop SignsWhere stop signs are temporarily removed for the construction of curb ramps, sidewalksor other construction, immediately provide a temporary stop sign which shall be installedto current standards. All associated costs shall be included in other items of work.

29. Adjust Existing Structure (2-0, 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 Inlet Repair)Prior to inlet adjustment, all concrete and masonry surfaces shall be cleaned to thesatisfaction of the Engineer. Remove I-beam, grease, laitance, loose bricks, mortar,unsound concrete, and other loose materials as directed.

Loose material shall be removed from the area to be patched or pointed exposing a soundsubbase. Replace existing I-beam. Fill holes, voids, spalled areas, and cavities caused bymissing or broken brick with non-shrink grout. New brick joints to be 1/2” Class Cmortar. Work includes patching, reworking, and reforming of invert and bench inlet, ifnecessary.

Frame, grates and hoods to be replaced as directed, and shall be paid separately per each(See Bid Items 819-10, 819-20, 819-21). Remove concrete hoods and install new metalhoods as directed. Construct 8” concrete apron adjacent to the inlet per OKC Drawing No.D-101 and ODOT Drawing No. CI-1-2, which are included in the Specifications. Theexisting structure shall be adjusted to the existing gutter line and be completed before thestreet mill/overlay work commences.

Method of Payment--All materials, labor and other incidental items of work necessary to adjust/repair the existing inlet shall be included in the bid unit price for each structure.

30. Pavement Reinforcement Grid


The Pavement Reinforcement Grid (Bid Item No. 988-02) shall be Tensar GG8511, Mirafi MPG 100, or approved equal. The material and installation specifications are included in these specifications (See Miscellaneous Detail Sheets). Any product materials that require an AC binder as a tack coat, the cost of the binder shall be included in the unit price for Pavement Reinforcement Grid. (example - Mirafi MPG)

31. Pavement Reinforcement Fabric (Fiberglass)The Pavement Reinforcement Fabric (Fiberglass) (Bid Item No. 988-03) shall be TensarGlassPave 50, Mirafi MPM50, or approved equal. The material and installationspecifications are included in these Specifications (See Miscellaneous Detail Sheets). Anyproduct materials that require an AC binder as a tack coat, the cost of the binder shall beincluded in the unit price for Pavement Reinforcement Grid. (example - Mirafi MPG)

32. Cement Treated BaseThis special provision adopts in its entirety the requirements of the ODOT 2009 StandardSpecifications for Highway Construction, Section 317, Cement Treated Base, which areincluded in these Specifications (See “Miscellaneous Detail Sheets”). The City ofOklahoma City Bid Item No. is 222-19, Cement Treated base (3 inches thick, 600 PSI, seeODOT Spec. Section 317). All materials, labor and other incidental items of workassociated with this bid item and required by the specifications shall be included in the bidunit price.

33. Pedestrian Push ButtonsAt an intersection, all Pedestrian Push Buttons must be one type, either Generation 2 orGeneration 3. Do not mix the two. Also, there must be only one Central Control Unit perintersection.

34. Reinforcement Grid for BasesThe Reinforcement Grid for Bases (Bid Item No. 988-04) must be Tensar TriAx GeogridTX 140, Mirafi R5580i, or approved equal. The material and installation specifications areincluded in these Specifications (See Miscellaneous Detail Sheets).

35. Project SignFor “Better Roads Safer City” projects, the Contractor must install two 4’ X 4’ or two 4’X 8’ project signs (one on each end of the project) provided by the City. They can bepicked up at the Street Division located at 3738 SW 15th Street, Oklahoma City,Oklahoma. The sign location will be determined be the City. All materials, including themetal posts and bolts, to be supplied by the City. When the project is completed, the signsmust be removed by the Contractor and either moved to another project or delivered backto the Street Division. Bid Item 729-10, “Remove and Replace Sign”, to be used to payfor said labor costs.

36. Pavement SmoothnessThis special provision adopts in the entirety the Requirements of the current ODOTstandards or most recent ODOT Special Provision for Pavement and Bridge DeckSmoothness.


Any references to the Department, Resident Engineer or Materials Engineer shall be interpreted to mean the City and the City Engineer.

Only applies to Urban and Rural Arterial Streets.

37. Concrete Strength (Mix Design)All Class A mixes shall have a minimum strength 28 day strength of 3500 PSI. All classAA or HES (High Early Strength) mixes shall have a minimum 28 day strength of 4000PSI.


LIST OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Successful Bidder, as Contractor, is responsible for the proper completion and submission of the documents listed below within seven (7) calendar days following the City’s notification of its intent to award Contract, unless that time is extended by the City Engineer.

All forms must have the original ink signature of a person authorized to bind the Contractor. All documents must be attested to or notarized as required by the "Signature Requirements for Bidding Documents."

All bonds must be issued by a surety licensed to do business in the State of Oklahoma and meeting the requirements of the Oklahoma Competitive Bidding Act (Title 61 O.S. 2011, §113) and the Instruction to Bidders.

REQUIRED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Contract Performance Bond in the amount of the Contract Statutory Bond in the amount of the Contract Maintenance Bond in the amount of the Contract and for the term required in the Special Provisions Certificate of Nondiscrimination *Small and Disadvantaged Local Business Subcontracting Plan & AffidavitCertificates of Insurance in the types and amounts required in the Special Provisions, including:

Workers' Compensation Public liability and Property Damage Builder's Risk

Defect Bond, if required by the Contractor's Prequalification Resolution Any other documents required in the Bidding Documents

*A notice to proceed will not be issued by the City Engineer until the Small and DisadvantagedLocal Business Subcontract Plan & Affidavit is received by the City Engineer. Subsequent tocompletion of project final inspection, neither project final acceptance nor payment of final claimwill be initiated until the Small and Disadvantaged Local Business Subcontracting Plan CloseOut Report is received by the City Engineer.

Forms to be Used. Contractor shall use only the forms provided by the City of Oklahoma City or photocopies thereof and shall make no changes or alterations in the documents other than to add signature lines for joint ventures or limited liability companies in accordance with the instructions in the "Signature Requirements for Bidding Documents."


CONTRACT

THIS CONTRACT AND AGREEMENT, made and entered into this __________ day

of _________, 20____, by and between the City of Oklahoma City, party of the first part,

hereinafter termed "City", and ______________________________, party of the second part,

hereinafter termed "Contractor".

WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS, the City has caused to be prepared in accordance with law, certain

specifications, and other bidding documents for the work hereinafter described and has approved

and adopted all of said bidding documents, and has caused Solicitation for Bids to be given and

advertised as required by law, and has received sealed proposals for the furnishing of all labor

and materials for:

(insert project name and number)

as outlined and set out in the bidding documents and in accordance with the terms and provisions

of said Contract; and

WHEREAS, Contractor, in response to said Solicitation for Bids, published in The

Journal Record, ________________, has submitted to the City in the manner and at the time

specified, a sealed proposal in accordance with the terms of this Contract; and

WHEREAS, the City in the manner provided by law, has publicly opened, examined,

and canvassed the proposals submitted and has determined and declared the above named

Contractor to be the lowest responsible bidder on the above described project, and has duly

awarded this Contract to said Contractor for the sum named in the proposal, to wit:

_______________________________________ Dollars($__________).

NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the mutual agreements and covenants

herein contained, the parties to this Contract have agreed and hereby agree as follows:

1. The Contractor shall, in a good and first-class workmanlike manner, at its own

cost and expense, furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to perform and

complete said work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, including the Bidding

Documents, "Standard Specifications for Construction of Public Improvements", any special

provisions, schedules and the plans adopted and approved by the City, all of which documents

are on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Oklahoma City and are made a part of


this Contract as fully as if the same were herein set out at length, with the following additions

and/or exceptions: (if none, so state) None.

2. The City shall make payments to the Contractor in the following manner: On or

about the first day of each month, the City Engineer, or other appropriate person, will review

estimates of the value, based on Contract prices and/or schedule of values of work done and

materials incorporated in the work and of materials suitably stored at the site thereof during the

preceding calendar month. The Contractor shall furnish to the City Engineer, or other

appropriate person, such detailed information as he may request. Each monthly estimate for

payment must contain or have attached an affidavit as required by 74 O.S. § 85.22.

3. On completion of the work, but prior to the acceptance thereof by the City, it shall

be the duty of the City Engineer, or other appropriate person, to determine that said work has

been completely and fully performed in accordance with said Contract Documents, and upon

making such determination, said official shall make his final certificate to the City. The

Contractor shall furnish proof that all claims and obligations incurred by him in connection with

the performance of said work have been fully paid and settled; said information shall be in the

form of an affidavit, which shall bear the approval of the surety on the Contract bonds for

payment of the final estimate to the Contractor; thereupon, the final estimate (including

retainages) will be approved and paid and the same shall be in full for all claims of every kind

and description said Contractor may have by reason of having entered into or arising out of this

Contract.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this instrument to be

executed in one (1) original, the day and year first above written.

____________________________________ ATTEST: Contractor (name of company)

________________________________ ________________________________ (Witness/Secretary) (Individual - President)

THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY ATTEST:

________________________________ __________________________________


City Clerk Mayor

REVIEWED for form and legality.

__________________________________ Assistant Municipal Counselor


PERFORMANCE BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That We, ____________________________________________________, as

Contractor, and ______________________________________________________, as Surety,

are held and firmly bound unto the City of Oklahoma City, a municipal corporation and City of

the first class, of the State of Oklahoma, hereinafter termed “City”, in the full and just sum of

______________________________________________________ Dollars ($__________), such

sum being equal to 100% of the Contract price for the payment of which, well and truly to be

made, we, and each of us, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and assigns, themselves, and its

successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

The conditions of this obligation are such, that whereas, said Contractor is the lowest and

best bidder for the making of the following City work and improvement:

(insert project number and name)

has entered into a certain written Contract with the City on the ___ day of __________________,

20___, for the erection and construction of said work and improvement all in compliance with

the plans and specifications therefore, made a part of said Contract and on file in the Office of

the City Clerk, and said Contract is hereby made a part and parcel of this bond as if literally

written herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Contractor shall fully and faithfully execute the work and

perform said Contract according to its terms, conditions, and covenants, and in exact accordance

with the bid of said Contractor, and according to certain plans and specifications heretofore

made, adopted, and placed on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Oklahoma City,

as set out in the specifications herein, and shall promptly pay or cause to be paid, all labor,

material and/or repairs and all bids for labor performed on said work, whether by subcontract or

otherwise, and shall protect and save harmless the said City and all interested property owners

against all claims, demands, causes of action, losses or damage, and expense to life or property

suffered or sustained by any person, firm, or corporation by reason of negligence of the

Contractor or his or its agents, servants, or employees in the construction of said work, or by or

in consequence of any improper execution of the work or act of omission or use of inferior

materials by said Contractor, or his or its agents, servants, or employees, and shall protect and


save the City harmless from all suits and claims of infringement or alleged infringement of

patent rights or processes, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, this obligation shall

remain in full force and effect.

IT IS FURTHER EXPRESSLY AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD by the parties

hereto that no changes or alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of

procedure herein fixed shall have the effect of releasing the sureties, or any of them, from the

obligations of this bond.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Contractor has caused these presents to be executed

in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officer, and the

said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporate seal to be

hereunto affixed by its attorney-in-fact, duly authorized so to do, the day and year first above

written.

Executed this ____ day of _________________, 20___ by the Contractor.

______________________________ Contractor (name of company)

ATTEST:

________________________________ By: _______________________________ Secretary/Witness Authorized Officer

Executed this ___ day of __________________, 20__ by the Surety.

______________________________ ATTEST: Surety

________________________________ By: _______________________________ Secretary/Witness Attorney-in-Fact


__________________________________ Assistant Municipal Counselor


APPROVED by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City this ______ day of_______________________________, 20______.

ATTEST:

________________________________ __________________________________ City Clerk Mayor

City Standard 4/5/2021 Page 341

STATUTORY BOND


That We, ____________________________________________________, as

Contractor, and ______________________________________________________, as Surety,

are held and firmly bound unto the State of Oklahoma, in the sum of

______________________________________________________ Dollars ($__________), such

sum being equal to 100% of the Contract price for the payment of which, well and truly to be

made, we, and each of us, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and assigns, themselves, and its

successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

The conditions of this obligation are such, that whereas, the above Bonded Contractor,

____________________________, is the lowest and best bidder for the making of the following

City work and improvement:


and has entered into a certain written Contract with the City of Oklahoma City (hereinafter

termed “City”) on the ___ day of __________________, 20___, for the erection and construction

of said work and improvement, in exact accordance with the bid of said Contractor, and

according to certain plans and specifications theretofore made, adopted and placed on file in the

Office of the City Clerk of the City of Oklahoma City.

NOW, THEREFORE, if said Contractor shall fail or neglect to pay all indebtedness

incurred by said Contractor or subcontractor of said Contractor who perform work in the

performance of said Contract, and such repairs to and rental of machinery and equipment as may

be furnished by a subcontractor to the person or persons contracting with the City, within thirty

(30) days after the same becomes due and payable, the person, firm or corporation entitled

thereto may sue and recover on this bond, the amount so due and unpaid.

It is further expressly agreed and understood by the parties hereto that no changes or

alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of procedure herein fixed

shall have the effect of releasing the sureties, or any of them, for the obligations of this bond.


in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officers; and the




written.

Executed this ____ day of ________________, 20___ by the Contractor.

______________________________ ATTEST: Contractor (name of company)

_______________________________ By:_______________________________ Secretary/Witness Authorized Officer

Executed this ____ day of _________________, 20___ by the Surety.

_________________________________ Surety

ATTEST:

________________________________ By:______________________________ Secretary/Witness Attorney-In-Fact


_________________________________ Assistant Municipal Counselor

APPROVED by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City this __________ day of _________________________, 20______.

ATTEST:

_______________________________ __________________________________ City Clerk Mayor


MAINTENANCE BOND


That We, ____________________________________________________, as

Contractor, and______________________________________________________, as Surety,

are held and firmly bound unto the City of Oklahoma City, a municipal corporation, and City of

the first class, of the State of Oklahoma (hereinafter termed “City”), in the full and just sum of

______________________________________________________ Dollars ($__________), such

sum being equal to the Contract price for a period of __________ (___) year(s), for the payment

of which, well and truly to be made, we, and each of us, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, and

assigns, themselves, and its successors and assigns, joint and severally, firmly by these presents.

The conditions of this obligation are such that whereas, said Contractor has by a certain

Contract between the Contractor and the City, dated this ___ day of __________________,

20___, agreed to construct in the City of Oklahoma City:


all in compliance with the Contract Documents therefore, made a part of said Contract and on

file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Oklahoma City; and to maintain the said

improvement in the amounts set forth above against any failure due to workmanship or material

for a period of __________ years from the date of acceptance of said project by the City Council

of the City of Oklahoma City.

NOW, THEREFORE, if said Contractor shall pay or cause to be paid to the City, all

damage, loss, and expense which may result by reason of defective materials and/or

workmanship in connection with said work occurring within a period of __________ year(s)

from and after acceptance of said project by the City, then this obligation shall be null and void,

otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect.

It is further agreed that if the said Contractor or Surety herein shall fail to maintain said

improvements against any failure due to defective workmanship and/or material for a period of

__________ year(s) and at any time repairs shall be necessary that the cost of making said

repairs shall be determined by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City, or some person or

persons designated by them to ascertain the same, and if, upon thirty (30) days notice, the said

amount ascertained shall not be paid by the Contractor or Surety herein, or if the necessary


repairs are not made, the said amount shall become due upon the expiration of thirty (30) days

and suit may be maintained to recover the amount so determined in any Court of competent

jurisdiction. And that the amount so determined shall be conclusive upon the parties as to the

amount due on this bond for the repair or repairs included therein, and that the cost of all repairs

shall be so determined from time to time during the life of this bond as the condition of the

improvements may require.

It is further expressly agreed and understood by the parties hereto that no changes or

alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of procedure herein fixed

shall have the effect of releasing the sureties, or any of them, from the obligations of this bond.


in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officers; and the



written.

Executed this ____ day of ___________________, 20___ by the Contractor.

___________________________ ATTEST: Contractor (name of company)

________________________________ By_________________________ Secretary/Witness Authorized Officer

Executed this ___ day of _______________, 20__ by the Surety.

___________________________ Surety

ATTEST:

________________________________ By:__________________________ Secretary/Witness Attorney-in-Fact



_______________________________ Assistant Municipal Counselor

APPROVED by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City this _______ day of ______________________________, 20______.

ATTEST:

_______________________________ __________________________________ City Clerk Mayor


DEFECT BOND

We, ____________________________________________________, as Contractor, and

______________________________________________________, as Surety, a corporation

organized under the laws of the State of ______________________, and authorized to transact

business in the State of Oklahoma, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Oklahoma City, a

municipal corporation, and City of the first class, of the State of Oklahoma (hereinafter termed

“City”), in the amount of ______________________________________________________

Dollars ($__________); said sum being equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract

price as provided herein for a period of _____ year(s). We, as Contractor and Surety, bind

ourselves and each of us, our heirs, executors, administrators, trustees, successors and assigns,

jointly and severally.

WHEREAS, the Contractor entered into a written Contract with the City to perform and

provide work and construct or create or repair the project, to wit: Project No. ____________,

generally described as _________________________________ all in compliance with the

Bidding Documents for said project.

NOW, THEREFORE, should the Contractor, during the term of this Defect Bond,

timely and expeditiously repair or replace, or cause to be repaired or replaced, any defective,

inferior or non-compliant workmanship, work and material regarding or relating to the project,

and should the Surety, at the end of the term of this Defect Bond, pay, or cause to be paid, to the

City all damages, losses, costs and expenses which directly or indirectly may result from: (1) the

untimely repair or replacement of inferior, non-compliant or defective materials, work and

workmanship in connection with said project; (2) the failure to timely and expeditiously

maintain, repair or replace same; and (3) the cost and expense incurred by the City to have any

defective, inferior or non-compliant work, material or workmanship repaired, replaced or

maintained, timely and expeditiously, by City staff and/or third parties, then this Defect Bond

shall terminate at the end of the term provided in the Standard Provisions; otherwise, this Defect

Bond shall remain in effect.

The term of this Defect Bond shall commence upon the formal final acceptance of the

entire project by the City as fully and totally complete and shall run for: (1) the total number of

years as provided in the Standard Provisions for this project ("term of years"); or (2) until all

repairs and replacement of defective, inferior or non-compliant materials, work or workmanship,


occurring or discovered prior to the termination of this Defect Bond have been completed and all

sums due from the Surety and the Contractor therefore have been paid, whichever is later.

Executed this ____ day of ________________, 20___ by the Contractor.

_________________________________ Contractor (name of company)

ATTEST:

_______________________________ By: _______________________________ Secretary/Witness Authorized Officer

Executed this ___ day of __________________, 20___ by the Surety.

_________________________________ Surety

ATTEST:

_______________________________ By: _______________________________ Secretary/Witness Attorney-in-Fact

REVIEWED for form.

_________________________________ Assistant Municipal Counselor

APPROVED by the City of Oklahoma City this day of ___________________, 20______.

ATTEST:

_______________________________ _________________________________ City Clerk Mayor



CERTIFICATE OF NONDISCRIMINATION

In connection with the performance under the Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:

A. The Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant foremployment because of race, creed, sex, color, national origin, ancestry, age or disability asdefined by the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, Sec. 3(2). Contractor shall takeaffirmative action to ensure that employees are treated without regard to their race, creed, sex,color, national origin, ancestry, age or disability, as defined by the Americans with DisabilitiesAct of 1990, Sec. 3(2). Such actions shall include, but not be limited to, the following:employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruiting or recruitment, advertising, layoff ortermination, rate of pay or other forms of compensation and selection for training, includingapprenticeship. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall agree to post in a conspicuous place,available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the City Clerkof the City of Oklahoma City setting forth the provisions of this Section.

B. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with this Nondiscrimination Certificate,the Contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended by the Contracting Public Entity. TheContractor may be declared by the Contracting Public Entity ineligible for further contracts untilsatisfactory proof of intent to comply shall be made by the Contractor and/or Subcontractors.

C. The Contractor agrees to include the requirements of this Nondiscrimination Certificatein any subcontracts connected with the performance of this Contract.

I have read the above and agree to abide by these requirements:

This form must be fully completed and signed by the Contractor or Contractor's Authorized Agent.

__________________________________________ Name of Individual, Partnership, Limited Liability Company, or Corporation hereinafter called Bidder

____________________________________ Signature of Bidder or Authorized Agent

_______________________________________________ Type or print name and title of person who signed above

This Certificate is required by Oklahoma City Municipal Code, Chapter 25, Article III § 25-41, as incorporated by reference in the City of Oklahoma City's Standard Specifications for the Construction of Public Improvements or otherwise in the Bidding Documents.



PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SUBCONTRACTING PLAN & AFFIDAVIT

The following Affidavit must be submitted by the successful Bidder, or Bidder's Authorized Agent. A Notice to Proceed will not be issued by the City Engineer until the affidavit is received.

The undersigned, of lawful age, being first duly sworn on oath, affirms and states that the Bidder has the authority to execute this Public Construction Project Subcontracting Plan. The bidder further states that they understand the resolution creating the Small, Disadvantaged, Minority and Woman-owned Subcontracting Program adopted by the City Council of the City of Oklahoma City on June 3, 2008.

I. Public Construction Project Subcontracting Plan

A. Outreach - In the space provided below describe in detail your company’s efforts regardingoutreach to small, minority, disadvantaged and women owned businesses in an effort to utilizetheir services in conjunction with Project Number ________________________.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ B. Internal Efforts – In the space provided below describe in detail any initiatives in place withinyour company directed at establishing policies and procedures to ensure that small, minority,disadvantaged and women owned businesses are made aware of and given the opportunity tosubmit bids for sub-contracting on publicly funded projects.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A Notice to Proceed for the project listed above will not be issued by the City Engineer until this document is completed and returned to the Public Works department. The document must be completed and signed by the Contractor, and notarized, dated and completed by the Notary Public.


____________________________________________ Name of Individual, Partnership, Limited Liability Company, or Corporation hereinafter called Bidder

____________________________________ Signature of Contractor or Authorized Agent

______________________________________________ Type or print name and title of person who signed above

STATE OF ____________________) ) §

COUNTY OF ____________________)

Signed and sworn to or affirmed before me on this _____ day of ____________________,

20_____, by ____________________________ as the above named Contractor or Contractor’s

Authorized Agent.

____________________________ Notary Public

My Commission expires ____________________ My Commission number ____________________

This Affidavit is required to be submitted with the Contractors' Subcontracting Plan.


PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SUBCONTRACTING PLAN CLOSE OUT REPORT

Project No. and Name: _______________________________________________________

Submitted for: ____________________________ By ______________________________ Company Name Signature

This form shall be completed and returned to the City Engineer's Office following final inspection. Final acceptance and payment of final claim will not be initiated until receipt of this document by the City Engineer.

In the space provided below please provide the requested information for each subcontractor employed on the project listed above.

Subcontractor Name and Address Dollar amount of of Principal Place of Business Subcontract


ISSUE DATE:________________ THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE

Project No. & Name: _____________

PRODUCER

ADDRESS

NOTE: THIS CERTIFICATE CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER, NOR DOES IT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY POLICIES BELOW, EXCEPT AS SHOWN BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A LETTER COMPANY B LETTER

INSURED

ADDRESS

COMPANY C LETTER COMPANY D LETTER COMPANY E LETTER

COVERAGES: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE INSURANCE POLICIES LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSUREDS, FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED HEREIN. THE POLICIES SHOWN IN THIS CERTIFICATE ARE DEEMED PRIMARY TO ANY INSURANCE CARRIED BY THE INSUREDS FOR THE SPECIFIC LOCATION, PROJECT OR EVENT. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY

EFFECTIVE DATE POLICY EXPIRATION DATE

LIMITS

GENERAL LIABILITY _____ COMMERCIAL

GENERAL LIABILITY

_____ OCCURRENCE _____ CLAIMS MADE

AND TAIL COVERAGE

GENERAL AGGREGATE BODILY INJURY (Per Person) PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per Accident) EACH OCCURRENCE

MEDICAL EXPENSES (Any One (1) Person)

AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY _____ ANY AUTO _____ ALL OWNED AUTOS _____ SCHEDULED AUTOS _____ HIRED AUTOS _____ NON-OWNED AUTOS

COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT BODILY INJURY (Per Person) BODILY INJURY (Per Accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE

WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER LIABILITY Standard Compliance for the State of Oklahoma

EACH ACCIDENT

DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE

VALUABLE PAPERS INSURANCE (If required by Contract)

EXCESS LIABILITY (If required by Contract)

EACH OCCURRENCE

AGGREGATE

OTHER (If required by Contract)

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS

THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY IS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED, WITH RESPECT TO LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF THE PROJECT OR EVENT. THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY IS A LOSS PAYEE ON VALUABLE PAPERS INSURANCE. CERTIFICATE HOLDER(S)

The City of Oklahoma City and its beneficiary trusts 420 W. Main St., Suite 400 Oklahoma City, OK 73102

CANCELLATION

IT IS AGREED THAT NONE OF THESE POLICIES WILL BE CANCELLED OR CHANGED EXCEPT IN THE APPLICATION OF THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY LIMIT PROVISIONS, SO AS TO AFFECT THE INSURANCE DESCRIBED IN THIS CERTIFICATE UNTIL AFTER 30 DAYS PRIOR WRITTEN NOTICE OF SUCH CANCELLATION OR REDUCTION IN COVERAGES AND 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE OF NON-RENEWAL FOR NONPAYMENT OF PREMIUM HAS BEEN DELIVERED TO THE CERTIFICATED HOLDER.


(PLEASE READ CAREFULLY)

CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE EXPLANATION OF THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY AND PARTICIPATING TRUST(S)

The Certificate Holder(s) require the use of this Certificate of Insurance as evidence that the insurance requirements of the contract have been complied with and will continue as long as the contract is in force. The City and/or Trust rely on this Certificate as proof of compliance with the insurance requirements agreed upon. The City and/or Trust must be advised of any cancellation or nonrenewal of the insurance coverages required or any reduction in the coverages provided, in compliance with the contract, as shown in the Certificate of Insurance. Thirty (30) days prior written notice of cancellation or reduction in coverages (other than an aggregate limit provision reduction) and ten (10) days written notice of nonrenewal for nonpayment of premium must be provided to the City and/or Trust so that the City and/or Trust may take appropriate action.

Many certificates of insurance are received by the City and its Trusts and many contain statements claiming that the certificate is issued as a matter of information only and confers no rights upon the certificate holder. A common example is "Should any of the above described policies be canceled before the expiration date hereof, the issuing company will endeavor to mail (number of days) days written notice to the named holder, but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation of liability of any kind upon the company, its agents or representatives." This is unacceptable.

The City and Trust have the right of notice of cancellation, nonrenewal and reduction of coverage, as a requirement in the contract. The City and Trust rely upon the Certificate of Insurance as evidence of contract compliance.

The authorization requirement (that the authorized representative signing the Certificate of Insurance provide written acknowledgment by the insurance company or companies to the City and/or Trust) is written proof that the person signing the Certificate is legally authorized by the insurance company or companies to obligate them, as shown in the Certificate.

The City and/or Trust must have positive evidence in the form of the Certificate of Insurance that the insurance requirements of the contract have been met and will continue to be met without interruption during the term of the contract.

No activity will begin until the insurance Certificate is received. Your cooperation in providing the City and/or Trust with acceptable evidence of insurance compliance will prevent confusion and delay.


LIST OF DOCUMENTS REQUIRED FOR THIS BID

Project Number: ______________________________ Description: ______________________________

The Bidder is responsible for reviewing this list of required documents and any requirements of the Special Provisions and/or Special Provisions - Technical and assuring that each and every required document is properly completed. Forms and Affidavits should be completed and submitted in accordance with provisions of the "Signature Requirements for Bidding Documents." Bids not submitted in accordance with these requirements will be recommended for rejection. All documents required for this Bid are included in the Electronic Bidding Process.

DOCUMENTS REQUIRED FOR THIS BID

Completed Electronic Line Items (Item Response Form) Anti/Non-Collusion Affidavit Business Relationship Affidavit Bid Security Completed Special Questionnaire(s)

Failure to submit a required document may be cause for rejection of the Bid. However, the contracting public entity reserves the right to require timely submission of document(s) required in the Special Provisions.

Forms Not in Packet. If an item is listed on this page or in the Special Provisions and the form is not included in this packet, it is the Bidder's responsibility to notify the City Engineer.

Forms to be Used. Bidder must use the forms provided in the Electronic Bidding Process. Bid Security form shall be provided by the Contractor.


SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDING DOCUMENTS

All Bid Documents and Contract Documents must be signed by a person having the legal authority to bind the Bidder/Contractor and be completed in accordance with the rules listed below.

PART I. A. INSTRUCTIONS FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS

(1) The name of the individual, limited liability company, partnership, corporation or jointventure submitting the Bid must be provided. The Bidding Documents must be electronicallysigned in accordance with the requirements of Part I.B. herein. The name and title of each personwho electronically signed the Bidding Documents must be provided.

(2) All blank spaces in the Bidding Documents, which require the provision of anyinformation or any statement from the Bidder must be filled in or the Bid may be rejected.

(3) All Affidavits must be completed, signed and submitted electronically.

(4) The Bid Security must be submitted with the Bid in accordance with the BiddingDocuments

PART I. B. SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMISSION OF THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS

(1) Bids submitted by a Corporation: Bidding Documents must be electronically signed bythe President or Vice President of the corporation, or comply with Part I.B.(6).

(2) Bids submitted by a Sole Proprietorship or Individual: Bidding Documents must beelectronically signed by the owner or individual, or comply with Part I.B.(6).

(3) Bids submitted by a Partnership: Bidding Documents must be electronically signed by aGeneral Partner, or comply with Part I.B.(6).

(4) Bids submitted as a Joint Venture: Bidding Documents must be electronically signed byan authorized agent having authority to bind the Joint Venture and comply with Part I.B.(6).

(5) Bids Submitted by a Limited Liability Company: Bidding Documents must beelectronically signed by the Manager or an authorized agent having authority to bind the limitedliability company, or comply with Part I.B.(6). Such Bids must be accompanied by thedocumentation required in Part II.B. (5) below.

(6) Signature Requirements for Bidder's Authorized Agent: Some businesses may delegatethe authority to sign the Bidding Documents to an authorized agent. In such cases, all documentsrequiring signature must be electronically signed by the "authorized" agent. Attached to theBidding Documents must be the documentation required in Part II.B.(6) below.


(7) Additional Documentation: Additional documentation of authority may be required onany authority issue or Contract issue.

PART II. A. INSTRUCTIONS FOR SUBMISSION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

(1) All documents listed on the "List of Contract Documents" must be submitted withinseven (7) calendar days following the City’s notification of its intent to award Contract, unlessthat time is extended by the City Engineer (if the Bidder shows delays in returning the contractare beyond the Bidder's control).

(2) The Contract and other forms must be signed and, if so provided on the form, notarized.Where notarization is required, the notary must legibly: enter the date; enter the name and titleof the affiant (person(s) sworn); sign as Notary Public; provide the date of commissionexpiration; and may impress his/her notary seal or stamp, where applicable.

(3) Type or legibly print the name of the individual, limited liability company, partnership,corporation or joint venture awarded the Contract on the line provided for this information. Thename and title of each person who signed the Contract Documents must be typed or legiblyprinted on the line below the signature line.

PART II. B. SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMISSION OF THE CONTRACT AND BONDS

(1) Contracts submitted by a Corporation: Contract Documents must have the original inksignature of the President or Vice President of the corporation. That signature must be witnessedby the Corporate Secretary or Assistant Corporate Secretary, and the firm's corporate seal, if any,must be affixed in accordance with 18 O.S. (2011) § 1016. Should the corporation not have aseal or should the seal not be available, then the person signing must demonstrate authority tobind the corporation, as set forth in paragraph II.B.(6) below. The name and title of each personwho signed the Contract or bond must be typed or legibly printed on the line below the signatureline.

(2) Contracts submitted by a Sole Proprietorship or Individual: Contract Documents musthave the original ink signature of the owner or individual, respectively, on the signature line, orcomply with Part II.B.(6). The name and title of each person who signed the Contract or bondmust be typed or legibly printed on the line below the signature line.

(3) Contracts submitted by a Partnership: Contract Documents must have the original inksignature of a General Partner on the signature line, or comply with Part II.B.(6). The name andtitle of each person who signed the Contract or bond must be typed or legibly printed on the linebelow the signature line.

(4) Contracts submitted by a Joint Venture: If two or more parties submit a joint Bid, theContract Documents must be signed in ink by the appropriate representatives of each/all parties.Any of the parties which are corporations must have the appropriate signature(s) andattestation(s) as provided above, or comply with Part II.B.(6). The Contract Documents should


be altered, but only to add the signature lines (name of Contractor, signature line, name and title line, and attestation line) to meet this requirement. The name and title of each person who signed the Contract or bond must be typed or legibly printed on the line below the signature line.

(5) Contracts Submitted by a Limited Liability Company: Contract Documents must havethe original ink signature of the Manager or an authorized agent having authority to signcontracts and bonds and to bind the limited liability company. Attached to the ContractDocuments, signed by the authorized agent, must be a properly executed copy of the articles oforganization; the operating agreement; and any bylaws, resolution or other document of theauthorizing entity, specifically providing the authorized agent with the authority to execute theContract Documents on behalf of and binding the authorizing entity. All documents designatingand authorizing the agent to bind the limited liability company must be notarized by a NotaryPublic who will complete the required information and may affix his/her seal or stamp. Thename and title of each person who signed the Contract Documents must be typed or legiblyprinted on the line below the signature line. Additional pages may be added, but each signaturemust be properly notarized.

(6) Signature Requirements for Bidder's Authorized Agent: Some businesses may delegatethe authority to sign the Contract Documents to an authorized agent. In such cases, all ContractDocuments requiring signature must have the original ink signature of the "authorized" agent.Attached to the Contract Documents, signed by the authorized agent, must be a properlyexecuted power of attorney or other document of the authorizing entity, specifically providingthe "authorized" agent with the authority to execute the Contract Documents on behalf of andbinding the authorizing entity. Each signature on the authorizing documents must be notarizedby a Notary Public who will complete the required information and may affix his/her seal orstamp. The name and title of each person who signed the Contract, bond, or any authorizingdocument must be typed or printed on the line below the signature line. Additional pages may beadded, but all signatures must be properly notarized. If attachments to the Bid Documents arerequired by this section, attachments may be uploaded through the Electronic Bidding Process.

(7) Additional Documentation: Additional documentation may be required.


ORIGINAL FORMS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CITY OF OKLAHOMA CITY:

BID LINE ITEMS FROM PERISCOPE

ANTI/NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP AFFIDAVIT